Professional Documents
Culture Documents
DP-4570 SH en 0011
DP-4570 SH en 0011
Model: DP-2090/2520/3000/3570/4570
Publish Date: April 2009
File No. SHE090001K0
R090121H2200-TTEC
Ver11_2012-08
Trademarks
• The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
• The official name of Windows 7 is Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista and the brand names and product names of other
Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.
and/or other countries.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
• PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• FLOIL is a registered trademark of Kanto Kasei Ltd. CORPORATION.
• Mylar is a registered trademark of DuPont Teijin Films U.S. Limited Partnership.
• Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• iCLASS is a trademark of HID Corporation.
• MIFARE is a trademark of Royal Philips Electronics.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.
1) Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two persons and be sure to hold the posi-
tions as shown in the figure.
The equipment is quite heavy, and e-STUDIO205L/255/305 weighs approximately 57 kg (125.66
lb.), and e-STUDIO355/455 weighs approximately 60 kg (132.28 lb.), therefore pay full attention
when handling it.
- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when trans-
porting the equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A, 220-240 V or 240
V / 8 A for its power source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
- When the equipment is used after the option is removed, be sure to install the parts or the covers
which have been taken off so that the inside of the equipment is not exposed.
2) General Precautions at Service
- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the
vicinity.
- Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer roller, developer, high-
voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power
supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric
charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
Explanatory label
Warning label
e-STUDIO205L/255/305 e-STUDIO355/455
Warning for high temperature Warning for high temperature area Warning for high temperature area
area (Fuser unit) (Fuser unit) (Fuser unit)
5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batter-
ies and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
ALLEGEMEINE SICHERHEITSMASSNAHMEN IN BEZUG
AUF DIE WARTUNG FÜR e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
Die Installation und die Wartung sind von einem qualifizierten Service-
Techniker durchzuführen.
1. Transport/Installation
- Zum Transportieren/Installieren des Gerätes werden 2 Personen benötigt. Nur an den in der
Abbildung gezeigten Stellen tragen.
Das Gerät ist sehr schwer und wiegt etwa 57 kg (e-STUDIO205L/255/305) oder 60 kg (e-
STUDIO355/455); deshalb muss bei der Handhabung des Geräts besonders aufgepasst wer-
den.
- Beim Transportieren des Geräts nicht an den beweglichen Teilen oder Einheiten (z.B. das Bedie-
nungsfeld, die Duplexeinheit oder die automatische Dokumentenzuführung) halten.
- Eine spezielle Steckdose mit Stromversorgung von AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V oder 127 V / 12 A,
220-240 V / 8 A als Stromquelle verwenden.
- Das Gerät ist aus Sicherheitsgründen zu erden.
- Einen geeigneten Standort für die Installation wählen. Standorte mit zuviel Hitze, hoher Luft-
feuchtigkeit, Staub, Vibrieren und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden.
- Für ausreichende Belüftung sorgen, da das Gerät etwas Ozon abgibt.
- Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewährleisten, muss ein Abstand von mindestens 80 cm
links, 80 cm rechts und 10 cm dahinter eingehalten werden.
- Das Gerät ist in der Nähe der Steckdose zu installieren; diese muss leicht zu erreichen sein.
- Nach der Installation muss das Netzkabel richtig hineingesteckt und befestigt werden, damit nie-
mand darüber stolpern kann.
- Falls der Auspackungsstandort und der Installationsstandort des Geräts verschieden sind, die
Bildqualitätsjustierung (automatische Gammajustierung) je nach der Temperatur und Luft-
feuchtigkeit des Installationsstandorts und der Papiersorte, die verwendet wird, durchführen.
2) Allgemeine Sicherheitsmassnahmen in bezug auf die Wartung
-
- Das Netzkabel herausziehen und den Bereich um die Steckerpole und die Steckdose die Umge-
bung in der Nähe von den Steckerzacken und der Steckdose wenigstens einmal im Jahr reini-
gen. Wenn Staub sich in dieser Gegend ansammelt, kann dies ein Feuer verursachen.
- Wenn die Teile auseinandergenommen werden, wenn nicht anders in diesem Handbuch usw
erklärt, ist das Zusammenbauen in umgekehrter Reihenfolge durchzuführen. Aufpassen, dass
kleine Teile wie Schrauben, Dichtungsringe, Bolzen, E-Ringe, Stern-Dichtungsringe, Kabel-
bäume nicht an den verkehrten Stellen eingebaut werden.
- Grundsätzlich darf das Gerät mit enfernten oder auseinandergenommenen Teilen nicht in
Betrieb genommen werden.
- Das PC-Board muss in einer Anti-elektrostatischen Hülle gelagert werden. Nur Mit einer Man-
schette bei Betätigung eines Armbandes anfassen, sonst könnte es sein, dass die integrierten
Schaltkreise durch statische Elektrizität beschädigt werden.
Vorsicht: Vor Benutzung der Manschette der Betätigung des Armbandes, das Netzkabel
des Gerätes herausziehen und prüfen, dass es in der Nähe keine geladenen
Gegenstände, die nicht isoliert sind, gibt.
- Setzen Sie sich während der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus. Dieses Gerät ist mit
einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den Laserstrahl zu
blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher, in den Pfad des
Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten sämtliche reflektierenden Metallgegenstände, wie
Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochtemperaturbereiche, wie die Belichtungslampe, die Fixiereinheit, die
Heizquelle und die umliegenden Bereiche, berühren.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochspannungsbereiche, wie die Ladeeinheiten, die Transferwalze, die Entwick-
lereinheit, den Hochspannungstransformator, den Steuerumrichter für die Belichtungslampe, den
Umrichter für die LCD-Hintergrundbeleuchtung und das Netzgerät, berühren. Insbesondere
sollten die Platinen dieser Komponenten nicht berührt werden, da die Kondensatoren usw. auch
nach dem Ausschalten des Geräts noch elektrisch geladen sein können.
- Vor dem Berühren potenziell gefährlicher Bereiche (z. B. drehbare oder betriebsrelevante Bere-
iche, wie Zahnräder, Riemen, Riemenscheiben, Lüfter und die Laseraustrittsöffnung der optis-
chen Lasereinheit) sicherstellen, dass das Gerät sich nicht bedienen lässt.
- Beim Entfernen von Abdeckungen vorsichtig vorgehen, da sich darunter scharfkantige Kompo-
nenten befinden können.
- Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
- Ausschließlich vorgesehene Werkzeuge und Hilfsmittel verwenden.
- Empfohlene oder gleichwertige Messgeräte verwenden.
- Nach Abschluss der Wartungsarbeiten das Gerät in den ursprünglichen Zustand zurück
versetzen und den einwandfreien Betrieb überprüfen.
- Das berührungsempfindliche Bedienungsfeld stets vorsichtig handhaben und keinen Stößen
aussetzen. Wenn die Oberfläche beschädigt wird, kann dies zu Funktionsstörungen führen.
3) Sicherheitsrelevante Wartungsteile
- Der Leistungsschutzschalter, der Türschalter, die Sicherung, der Thermostat, die Ther-
mosicherung, der Thermistor, die IC-RAMs einschließlich der Lithiumakkus usw. sind besonders
sicherheitsrelevant. Sie müssen unbedingt korrekt gehandhabt und installiert werden. Wenn
diese Teile kurzgeschlossen und funktionsunfähig werden, kann dies zu schwerwiegenden
Schäden, wie einem Abbrand, führen. Kurzschlüsse sind zu vermeiden, und es sind auss-
chließlich Teile zu verwenden, die von der Toshiba TEC Corporation empfohlen sind.
4) Warnetiketten
- Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen [z. B. „Unplug the power cable during service“ („Netzkabel vor Beginn der Wartung-
sarbeiten abziehen“), „CAUTION. HOT“ („VORSICHT, HEISS“), „CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE“
(„VORSICHT, HOCHSPANNUNG“), „CAUTION. LASER BEAM“ („VORSICHT, LASER“) usw.],
um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät angebracht sind.
Explanatory label
Warning label
e-STUDIO205L/255/305 e-STUDIO355/455
Warning for high temperature Warning for high temperature areaWarning for high temperature area
area (Fuser unit) (Fuser unit) (Fuser unit)
5) Entsorgung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs
- In Bezug auf die Entsorgung und Wiederverwertung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpack-
ungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs, einschließlich Lithiumakkus, sind die einschlägigen
nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu befolgen.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES ................................... 1-1
1.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 General .............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Copy .................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.1.3 Print ................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.4 Scan................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.5 e-Filing ............................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.6 Internet Fax...................................................................................................... 1-10
1.1.7 Network Fax..................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3 Options............................................................................................................................ 1-13
1.4 Supplies .......................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.5 System List...................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.5.1 e-STUDIO205L/255/305 .................................................................................. 1-15
1.5.2 e-STUDIO355/455 ........................................................................................... 1-16
2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES .......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Control panel check mode (01).......................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Test mode (03) .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Test print mode (04) .......................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.4 Adjustment mode (05) ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.5 Setting mode (08) .............................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.6 List print mode (9S) ........................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.7 PM support mode (6S)....................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.8 EPU replacement mode (7S) ............................................................................. 2-3
2.1.9 Firmware update mode (89)/(49) ....................................................................... 2-3
2.2 Input Check (Test Mode 03) ............................................................................................. 2-4
2.3 Output Check (Test Mode 03)......................................................................................... 2-12
2.4 Test Print Mode (Test Mode 04) ..................................................................................... 2-16
2.5 List Print Mode ................................................................................................................ 2-17
2.5.1 Operation procedure ........................................................................................ 2-17
2.5.2 List printing ...................................................................................................... 2-19
2.6 Adjustment Mode (05) .................................................................................................... 2-31
2.6.1 Operation procedure ........................................................................................ 2-31
2.6.2 Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) ..................................................... 2-33
2.6.3 Adjustment codes ............................................................................................ 2-34
2.7 Setting Mode (08)............................................................................................................ 2-63
2.7.1 Operation procedure ........................................................................................ 2-63
2.7.2 Setting codes ................................................................................................... 2-65
2.7.3 Pixel counter and its related code.................................................................. 2-204
2.7.4 PM support mode related code...................................................................... 2-217
2.8 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05)/Setting Mode (08) .................................... 2-222
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Adjustment Order .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor..................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1 General description............................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller........................................................... 3-6
3.3.3 Printer related adjustment.................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.4 Scanner related adjustment............................................................................. 3-14
3.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)................................................................ 3-22
3.4.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ......................................................................... 3-22
3.4.2 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 3-23
3.4.3 Background adjustment ................................................................................... 3-24
© 2009 - 2012 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
CONTENTS
1
3.4.4 Sharpness adjustment ..................................................................................... 3-24
3.4.5 Setting range correction................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.6 Adjustment of smudged/faint text .................................................................... 3-25
3.4.7 Gamma balance adjustment ........................................................................... 3-26
3.4.8 Adjustment of image density............................................................................ 3-27
3.4.9 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF ................................................... 3-27
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)................................................................. 3-28
3.5.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text .................................................................... 3-28
3.5.2 Adjustment of image density............................................................................ 3-29
3.5.3 Gamma balance adjustment............................................................................ 3-30
3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function).............................................................. 3-31
3.6.1 Gamma balance adjustment............................................................................ 3-31
3.6.2 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 3-32
3.6.3 Judgment threshold for ACS............................................................................ 3-33
3.6.4 Sharpness adjustment ..................................................................................... 3-33
3.6.5 Setting range correction................................................................................... 3-34
3.6.6 Background adjustment ................................................................................... 3-35
3.6.7 Fine adjustment of black density ..................................................................... 3-36
3.6.8 RGB conversion method selection .................................................................. 3-36
3.6.9 Adjustment of saturation .................................................................................. 3-36
3.6.10 Background processing offset adjustment....................................................... 3-37
3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (FAX Function)...................................................................... 3-38
3.7.1 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.2 Adjustment of image density............................................................................ 3-39
3.8 Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer........................................................................ 3-40
3.8.1 Adjustment....................................................................................................... 3-40
3.8.2 Precautions...................................................................................................... 3-46
3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section................................................................................. 3-48
3.9.1 Carriages ......................................................................................................... 3-48
3.9.2 Lens unit .......................................................................................................... 3-52
3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System....................................................................... 3-55
3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding ........................................ 3-55
3.11 Adjustment of Developer Unit ......................................................................................... 3-58
3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap ....................................................................................... 3-58
3.12 Adjustment of the RADF ................................................................................................. 3-61
3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF position........................................................................... 3-61
3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF height ............................................................................. 3-66
3.12.3 Adjustment of skew.......................................................................................... 3-68
3.12.4 Adjustment of the leading edge position.......................................................... 3-71
3.12.5 Adjustment of horizontal position ..................................................................... 3-73
3.12.6 Adjustment of copy ratio .................................................................................. 3-74
3.12.7 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor .................................................. 3-75
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1025) ............................................................................. 3-76
3.13.1 Adjusting the folding position (Electrical system (Finisher/Saddle unit)) ......... 3-76
3.13.2 Adjusting the sensor output (Electrical system (Puncher unit; option)) ........... 3-77
3.13.3 Registering the number of punch hole
(Electrical system (Puncher unit; option)) ........................................................ 3-78
3.13.4 After replacing the EEPROM (IC1002)
(Electrical system (Puncher unit; option)) ........................................................ 3-79
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1024) ............................................................................. 3-80
3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit) ............................................... 3-80
3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit) ..................................................... 3-81
3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) ......................................... 3-83
3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit).................... 3-85
3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) ........................................................ 3-86
3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ................................... 3-87
3.15 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101) ............................................................................. 3-88
3.15.1 Adjusting the alignment position ...................................................................... 3-88
1.1 Specifications 1
Values in [[ ]] are for e-STUDIO205L, values in {{ }} are for e-STUDIO305, values in [ ] are for e-
STUDIO355, values in { } are for e-STUDIO455 and values in < > are for e-STUDIO355/455 in case
that the specification is different among e-STUDIO205L, e-STUDIO255, e-STUDIO305, e-
STUDIO355 and e-STUDIO455.
e-STUDIO255S/305S for CNS is the same as e-STUDIO255/305 for CNS except that the Printer/
Scanner Kit (GM-2150C/GM-2160C) is not included.
e-STUDIO305SD for CNS is the same as e-STUDIO305 for CND except that HDD is changed to
SSD and the Printer/Scanner Kit (GM-2160C) is not included.
e-STUDIO205SE/255SE/305SE/355SE/455SE for NAS is the same as that for NAD except that the
Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) and External Interface Enabler (GS-1020) are included as
standard.
1.1.1 General
Type......................................... Desktop type (console type: when paper feed pedestal (PFP) and large
capacity feeder (LCF) are installed)
Original glass........................... Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
Bypass feeding:
Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 80 g/m2 (20 lb.
Bond)
PFP:(Option):
© 2009 - 2012 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-1
Two drawer: stack height 60.5 mm, 550 sheets; 80 g/m2 (20 lb.
Bond)
LCF:(Option)
Stack height 110 mm x 2: equivalent to 1000 sheets; 80 g/m2 (20
lb. Bond)
paper
Paper size Drawers A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5"
(Non-standard sizes are not available)
Bypass feeding A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5",
Envelope (DL, COM10, Monarch, CHO-3, YOU-4)
Bypass feeding Plain paper, Tracing paper, OHP film, Sticker labels,
Tab paper, Envelope (DL, COM10, Monarch, CHO-3, YOU-4)
Paper weight Drawers/LCF (optional) 64 - 105 g/m2 (17 - 28 lb. Bond)
Bypass feeding 52 - 209 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond - 110 lb. Index) (for single feed)
Plain paper: 64 - 80 g/m2 (17 - 20 lb. Bond)
Thin paper: 52 - 63 g/m2 (14 - 17 lb. Bond)
Thick 1: 81 - 105 g/m2 (21 - 28 lb. Bond)
Thick 2: 106 - 163 g/m2 (29 lb. Bond - 90 lb. Index)
Thick 3: 164 - 209 g/m2 (91 - 110 lb. Index)
64 - 209 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond - 110 lb. Index) (for continuous
feed)
Toner density control ............... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11
steps
HDD......................................... 60GB
Dimensions of the equipment...................... See the figure below (W 575 x D 586 x H 756 (mm))
* The height includes the surface of the original glass.
* When the tilt angle of the control panel is 7 to 84 degrees.
586
756
7-84°
575
Fig. 1-1
Original type:
Sheets (carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be
accepted)
Original size:
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R
Original capacity
Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2) (Stack height 16 mm)
Accepted originals ................... Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic
document feeder (RADF) only accepts paper which are not pasted or
stapled. Carbon paper are not acceptable either.
Maximum size: A3/LD
Single - sided original Double - sided original
35 - 157 g/m2 (9.3 - 41.8 lb. Bond) 50 - 157 g/m2 (13.3 - 41.8 lb. Bond)
Eliminated portion.................... Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (copy)
Leading / trailing edges: 4.2±2.0 mm, Side edges: 4.2±2.0 mm (print)
First copy time ......................... Approx. [[4.7]] 4.7 {{4.7}} <3.7> sec. or less
(A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually)
e-STUDIO255
Bypass feed
Paper size Drawer PFP LCF
Size specified Size not specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R 25.3 25.3 16.8 25.3 25.3
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 23.3 23.3 16.8 23.3 –
B4, LG 19.5 19.5 16.8 19.5 –
A3, LD 16.8 16.8 16.8 16.8 –
e-STUDIO355
Bypass feed
Paper size Drawer PFP LCF
Size specified Size not specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R 35.3 35.3 25.4 35.3 35.3
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 35.0 35.0 25.4 35.0 –
B4, LG 29.5 29.5 25.4 29.5 –
A3, LD 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 –
e-STUDIO455
Bypass feed
Paper size Drawer PFP LCF
Size specified Size not specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R 45.3 45.3 25.4 45.3 45.3
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 35.0 35.0 25.4 35.0 –
B4, LG 29.5 29.5 25.4 29.5 –
A3, LD 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 –
* “–” means “Not acceptable”.
* The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side,
multiple copying.
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, [[19.7]] 25.3 [[19.7]] 25.3 [[12.9]] 16.4 [[19.7]] 25.3 [[19.7]] 25.3
ST-R {{29.0}} [35.3] {{29.0}} [35.3] {{16.4}} [24.8] {{29.0}} [35.3] {{29.0}} [35.3]
{43.4} {43.4} {24.8} {43.4} {43.4}
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R [[16.5]] 22.5 [[16.5]] 22.5 [[12.9]] 16.4 [[16.5]] 22.5 [[-]] - {{-}} [-] {-}
{{22.5}} [33.9] {{22.5}} [33.9] {{16.4}} [24.8] {{22.5}} [33.9]
{33.9} {33.9} {24.8} {33.9}
B4, LG, [[14.5]] 19.0 [[14.5]] 19.0 [[12.9]] 16.4 [[14.5]] 19.0 [[-]] - {{-}} [-] {-}
FOLIO, {{19.0}} [28.7] {{19.0}} [28.7] {{16.4}} [24.8] {{19.0}} [28.7]
COMPUTER {28.7} {28.7} {24.8} {28.7}
A3, LD [[12.9]] 16.4 [[12.9]] 16.4 [[12.9]] 16.4 [[12.9]] 16.4 [[-]] - {{-}} [-] {-}
{{16.4}} [24.8] {{16.4}} [24.8] {{16.4}} [24.8] {{16.4}} [24.8]
{24.8} {24.8} {24.8} {24.8}
Page Description Language (RIP) PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, XPS, PCL5e, PDF(emulation)
Supported OS Windows 2000 / XP / Server 2003 / Server 2003 R2/ Vista /
Server 2008/ Server 2008 R2 / Windows 7 /
Mac OS X (Ver.10.2.4 or higher)
Solaris (SUN) / HP-UX / AIX (IBM) / Linux / SCO
Eliminated portion Leading edges / Trailing edges / Side edges: 4.2 (±2.0) mm
1.1.4 Scan
File formats JPEG (Gray scale mode only), Multi/Single page TIFF, Multi/Single
page PDF, Multi/Single page XPS
* Measuring condition of the scanning speed: Scanning single-sided A4/LT originals in the Text/Photo
mode with 100% reproduction ratio using the RADF
1.1.5 e-Filing
Scanning Original Document A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5, B5, B5-R, A5-R, LT, LT-R, LG, LD, ST, ST-R,
Size Computer, FOLIO
Original Document Size A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, LT, LG, LD, ST, FOLIO, Computer
e-STUDIO205L/255/305 e-STUDIO355/455 1
Original Cover KA-1640 PC/PC-C KA-1640 PC/PC-C
Reversing Automatic MR-3021/C MR-3022/C
Document Feeder (RADF)
Drawer Module MY-1033/C MY-1033/C
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1025/C KD-1025/C
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1026 A4/LT/A4-C KD-1026 A4/LT/A4-C
Finisher - MJ-1101/-C
Hanging Finisher MJ-1031/C MJ-1031/C
Saddle Stitch Finisher MJ-1025 MJ-1024
Hole Punch Unit MJ-6005N/E/F/S *1 (for MJ-1025) MJ-6004N/E/F/S *1 (for MJ-1024)
MJ-6101N/E/F/S *1 (for MJ-1101)
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1025/MJ- STAPLE-600 (for MJ-1024)
1031) STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1024/MJ-
1031)
STAPLE-2400 (for MJ-1101)
Bridge Kit KN-2520/C KN-2520/C
Job Separator MJ-5004/-C MJ-5006/C
Offset Tray MJ-5005/-C -
Operator's manual pocket KK-1660/-C KK-1660/-C
Accessible Arm KK-2550 KK-2550
Work Table KK-4550/C KK-4550/C
Damp Heater kit MF-4550 U/E MF-4550 U/E
Fax Unit GD-1250 NA/EU/AU/AS/TW/C GD-1250 NA/EU/AU/AS/TW/C
2nd Line for Fax Unit GD-1260 NA/EU/AU/TW/C GD-1260 NA/EU/AU/TW/C
Printer kit GM-1150/C GM-1160/C
Printer/Scanner kit GM-2150/C GM-2160/C
Scanner kit GM-4150/C GM-4160/C
Wireless LAN Module GN-1050/C GN-1050/C
Bluetooth Module GN-2010 GN-2010
Antenna GN-3010/C GN-3010/C
e-BRIDGE ID Gate KP-2004 (HID) KP-2004 (HID)
KP-2005/C (MIFARE) KP-2005/C (MIFARE)
Desk MH-2520 MH-2520
Meta Scan Enabler GS-1010 GS-1010
External Interface Enabler GS-1020 GS-1020
Data Overwrite Enabler GP-1070 GP-1070
IP Sec Enabler GP-1080 GP-1080
Harness kit for coin controller GQ-1180 GQ-1180
* 1) N: North America E: Europe F: France S: Sweden
Notes:
• "-" means "Not acceptable".
• The bridge unit (KN-2520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1101, MJ-1024, MJ-
1025, MJ-1031).
• The finisher (MJ-1101) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6101N/E/F/S).
• The finisher (MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S).
• The finisher (MJ-1025) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6005N/E/F/S).
• The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1050) and
Bluetooth module (GN-2010).
• Only one Antenna (GN-3010) can be installed in the Bluetooth Module (GN-2010), while up to
two can be installed in the Wireless LAN Module (GN-1050).
• The Work Table (KK-4550) and the e-BRIDGE ID Gate (KP-2004/2005) cannot be installed
together.
Work Table
Bridge Kit
KK-4550
KN-2520/C
Wireless LAN
module
e-STUDIO205L/255/305
GN-1050/C
1 - 15
Finisher
Fig. 1-2
MJ-1025
Antenna
Staple Cartridge Hole Offset Tray GN-3010/C
STAPLE-2000 Punch Unit MJ-5005/C
MJ-6005 Printer/Scanner Kit
N/E/F/S GM-2150/C
Damp Heater
kit Printer Kit
MF-4550 U/E GM-1150/C
e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1
Reversing Automatic
e-BRIDGE
1.5.2
Accessible Arm Document Feeder (RADF) Original Cover Harness kit for
KK-2550 KA-1640PC/-C coin controller ID Gate
MR-3022/C
GQ-1180 KP-2004
Hanging
Finisher e-BRIDGE
MJ-1031/C ID Gate
KP-2005/C
Hole
Staple Cartridge Punch Unit
STAPLE-2000 Operator's
MJ-6001
e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
manual pocket
N/E/F/S KK-1660/C
Finisher
MJ-1101/C
Work Table
e-STUDIO355/455
Bridge Kit
KK-4550
Staple Cartridge KN-2520/C
STAPLE-2400 Wireless LAN
module
Bluetooth
Saddle stitch module
Finisher GN-2010
1 - 16
Fig. 1-3
MJ-1024
Antenna
Staple Cartridge Job Separator GN-3010/C
STAPLE-2000 MJ-5006/C
STAPLE-600 Printer/Scanner Kit
Hole Punch Unit GM-2160/C
Damp Heater MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
kit Printer Kit
MF-4550 U/E GM-1160/C
2.1 Overview
Starting each mode 2
Shut down the equipment by pressing the [ON/OFF] button for a few seconds, then turn OFF the main
switch. Turn ON the main switch while pressing two digital keys designated to each mode (e.g. [0] and
[5]) simultaneously.
Note:
If the normal mode is started instead of self-diagnosis mode, start the equipment in the self-
diagnosis mode again.
List of modes
Mode For start Contents For exit Display
Control panel [0]+[1]+ All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all POWER
check mode POWER ON the LCD pixels blink. OFF/ON
Test mode [0]+[3]+ Checks the status of input/output signals. POWER 100% C A4
POWER ON OFF/ON TEST MODE
Test print [0]+[4]+ Outputs the test patterns. POWER 100% P A4
mode POWER ON OFF/ON TEST PRINT
Adjustment [0]+[5]+ Adjusts various items. POWER 100% A A4
mode POWER ON OFF/ON TEST MODE
Setting mode [0]+[8]+ Sets various items. POWER 100% D
POWER ON OFF/ON TEST MOD
List print [9]+[START] Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and POWER 100% L A4
mode +POWER ON 08, PM support mode, pixel counter, error OFF/ON LIST PRINT
history, firmware upgrade log and power ON/
OFF log, and also outputs them in a CSV
format.
PM support [6]+[START] Clears each counter. POWER 100% K
mode +POWER ON OFF/ON TEST MODE
EPU [7]+[START] When replacing EPU, this mode is available POWER
replacement +POWER ON for the installation of the EPU whose initial OFF/ON
mode detection is possible.
Firmware [8]+[9]+POWER ON Performs updating of the system firmware. POWER
update mode or OFF/ON
[4]+[9]+POWER ON
Note:
When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagnosis
mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line connectors
(LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be sure to finish
the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connecting the modular
code.
[POWER]
ON
Normal
Control panel Test print Adjustment Setting List print PM support EPU Firmware
Warming up check mode Test mode mode mode mode mode replacement update mode
mode
mode
Ready
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
Fig. 2-1
*1. Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
Operation procedure
[POWER] OFF/ON
[0][1] LED lit/ (Exit)
[START] (Button check)
[POWER] LCD blinking
[START]
The mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
Button Check
• Press the buttons with LED to turn OFF the LED.
• Press the buttons without LED to display the message on the control panel.
• Press the button on touch panel to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.
Press [execution] on the touch panel and then the [CLEAR] button on the control panel. The screen
then returns to the Button Check menu.
Operation procedure
[6][START]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
1: Auto-toner adjustment (Operation started) (Exit)
2: PM Support Screen
Operation procedure
[0][3]
[START] [FAX] [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] or (Exit)
[COPY]
[CLEAR]
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper-width sensor
Paper-width size
0 1 2 3
A3/A4 1 1 1 0
B4/B5 1 1 0 0
A4-R/A5 1 1 0 1
B5-R/B6 1 0 0 1
A5-R/A6 1 0 1 1
A6-R (Card size) 0 1 1 1
LD/LT 1 1 1 0
LG/LT-R/ST 1 1 0 1
ST-R/COMP 1 0 1 1
Table 3. Relation between the status of the original tray width sensor and paper size (width).
Original tray width sensor Paper width size Paper width size
TWID2S TWID1S TWID0S (LT series) (A4 series)
H H H LD/LT A3/A4
H H L - B5-R
H L H ST-R A5-R
L H H LD/LT A3/A4
L H L - -
L L H 8.5" x 8.5" / LT-R / LG / A4-R/FOLIO
13" LG
L L L COMPUTER B4/B5
H (= high level): Open L (= low level): Short
* 2
• Be sure to install the USB media to the equipment and check if the device can be used with this
code.
• Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the
accidental recording or deleting) of the USB media before performing the check, otherwise this
code cannot be used.
• It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB
media.
Operation procedure
Procedure 1
Procedure 2
Procedure 3
[0][3] [POWER]
Operation Operation Test mode OFF/ON
(Code) [START] [START] [CLEAR] standby
[POWER] ON OFF (Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF
[POWER]
Procedure 5
[0][3]
(Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)
[START]
* Return to the standby screen for code input by pressing the [CLEAR] button.
Operation procedure
[0][4]
(Code) [START] Operation [CLEAR] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] Continuous (Exit)
Test Printing
Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not
performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.
Print output
2
[9][START]
[POWER] (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] [POWER]
101: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to OFF/ON
102: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed (Exit)
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
108: Firmware update log (Maximum 200 items)
110: Power-ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items)
111: Version List
[9][START]
[POWER] Connect (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] Disconnect [POWER]
USB 201: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to USB OFF/ON
202: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed (Exit)
(Code)
203: PM support mode
204: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
205: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
206: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
208: Firmware update log (Maximum 200 items)
210: Power-ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items)
211: Version list CSV file output
213: Error log
214: Total counter list CSV file output
300: All CSV files
Notes:
Precautions when storing information into USB media
• When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB media, be sure to obtain
permission from a user in advance.
• When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB media, the information is
printed out in a CSV format. Handle and manage the information with extra care.
• Do not lose or leak the setting information of the equipment.
• Do not use the setting information of the equipment for purposes other than maintenance or
product services.
• Provide the information promptly if a user requires so.
Remark:
The buttons on the control panel keep blinking while data are being stored in the USB media.
• Do not disconnect the USB media while data are being stored.
• When the data of a code are printed again on the same equipment, the CSV file will be
overwritten because the names of these files contain the same serial number.
'08-02-08 20:13
Fig. 2-3
The selected adjustment codes and the current adjustment value for each code are output in a list.
See the following page for the adjustment code (05):
P.2-31 "2.6 Adjustment Mode (05)"
'08-02-08 20:13 2
Fig. 2-4
The selected setting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list. See the
following page for the setting code (08):
P.2-63 "2.7 Setting Mode (08)"
'09-02-08 20:13
Fig. 2-5
The number of pages currently output (OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the recommended
number of output pages for PM (PM OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the current drive count
(DRIVE COUNTS) and the recommended drive count for PM (PM DRIVE COUNTS) are output
together with PM units. Use this list for confirming the PM units to be replaced at each PM. See the
following page for PM:
Refer to P.5-1 "5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)".
2
'09-02-08 20:13
TONERCARTRIDGE
Fig. 2-6
Pixel counter data (toner cartridge reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel
counter:
P.2-204 "2.7.3 Pixel counter and its related code"
'09-02-08 20:13
SERVICEMAN
Fig. 2-7
Pixel counter data (service call reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel
counter:
P.2-204 "2.7.3 Pixel counter and its related code"
Fig. 2-8
The error history is output. See the following page for the parameters for each error:
Refer to P.6-24 "6.2.4 Printer function error".
FW UPGRADE LOG
S / N : 12345678901
'09-05-10 17:35 TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx
STATE DATE TOTAL COPY(B) COPY(2) COPY(C) PRINT(B) PRINT(2) PRINT(C) LIST FAX
MANUFACTURE 2009-04-17
UNPACKING 2009-04-17
V1.00 2009-04-17 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470SY0J001 2009-04-17 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470S-01 2009-04-17 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470M-01 2009-05-18 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470F-02 2009-05-18 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
V1.01 2009-06-18 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470SY0J002 2009-06-18 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470S-02 2009-06-18 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470M-02 2009-06-18 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470F-03 2009-06-18 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
V1.02 2009-07-17 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470SY0J003 2009-07-17 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470S-03 2009-07-17 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470M-03 2009-07-17 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
T470F-04 2009-08-18 99999999 99999999 0 0 99999999 0 0 99999999 99999999
Fig. 2-9
COPY (B) Copier counter data (black) when the ROM was downloaded
PRINT (B) Printer counter data (black) when the ROM was downloaded
LIST List print counter data when the ROM was downloaded
FAX Fax print counter data when the ROM was downloaded
S / N : 12345678901
'08-05-10 17:35 TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx 2
DATE TIME FUNCTION TOTAL DATE TIME FUNCTION TOTAL
030619-144650 ON 99999999 030624-163459 ON 99999999
030619-181201 OFF 99999999 030624-163459 OFF 99999999
030620-103551 ON 99999999 030624-163510 ON 99999999
030620-134930 OFF 99999999 030624-163735 OFF 99999999
030620-135026 ON 99999999 030624-164138 RMT_OFF 99999999
030620-141110 OFF 99999999
030623-112540 ON 99999999
030624-112524 OFF 99999999
030624-162102 RMT_OFF 99999999
030624-163459 OFF 99999999
Fig. 2-10
VERSION LIST
Fig. 2-11
PRINT COUNTER
TOTAL
BLACK TOTAL
COPY 1462 1462
FAX 0 0
PRINTER 1466 1466
LIST 3 3
TOTAL 2931 2931
COPY
BLACK TOTAL
SMALL 1406 1406
LARGE 56 56
TOTAL 1462 1462
FAX
BLACK TOTAL
SMALL 0 0
LARGE 0 0
TOTAL 0 0
PRINTER
BLACK TOTAL
SMALL 1402 1402
LARGE 64 64
TOTAL 1466 1466
LIST
BLACK TOTAL
SMALL 3 3
LARGE 0 0
TOTAL 3 3
SCAN COUNTER
TOTAL
Fig. 2-12
[CLEAR]
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-). (Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[ENTER] [FAX]
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code) [START] ( Value
displayed ) or
[INTERRUPT] [START]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
(Value unchangeable) (Test copy)
Procedure 3
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER] [FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] or [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] OFF/ON
[START] (Exit)
(Key in a value) Stores value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
( in RAM ) (Test copy)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 6
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [FAX]
[Digital key] Automatic [POWER]
[0][5]
[POWER] (Code)
[START] ( adjustment ) ( Stores value
in RAM ) [START] OFF/ON
(Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] (Test copy)
Procedure 10
[POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [Digital key] Value
[POWER] (Code)
[START]
(Sub code)
[START] ( displayed ) [START] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER] [FAX]
( )
[0][5] [Digital key] [UP] [POWER]
[POWER] (Code)
[START]
( Automatic
adjustment ) or
or
[INTERRUPT] [STAR T]
OFF/ON
[DOWN] (Exit)
Manual
(Adjust a value) (Stores value
in RAM )
(Test copy)
adjustment
[UP] [ENTER]
or or
[DOWN] [INTERRUPT]
(Adjust a value)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] (Stores value
in RAM )
* When the “storing is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button at the
manual adjustment, the “automatic adjustment” starts automatically.
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment
mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after
it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
<Default>
e-STUDIO205L: 6
e-STUDIO255: 6
e-STUDIO305: 6
e-STUDIO355: 8
e-STUDIO455: 8
7025 Image Background offset PPC 128 SYS The larger the 1
adjustment for RADF <0-255> adjustment value is, the
lighter the background
becomes. The smaller
the adjustment value is,
the darker the
background becomes.
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
* Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER]OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Procedure 3
[INITIALIZE]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or (Automatic setting)
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] [Digital key] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code)
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Exit)
Sets or (Stores value
changes value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
* Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] [Digital key] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
(Stores value in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] [Select icon] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [Digital key] or
[START] [START] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (1st setting) (2nd setting) [INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
[0][8] [Digital key] or [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START]
[POWER] (Code) [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit)
*1 [PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*1. Press [PAUSE] to enter “-”, when entering telephone number.
*2. The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER]
[START] [START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code) OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
[CLEAR] Adjustment value
(Corrects value) cannot be changed
KP-2005:
LLLL :
Key information
MMMM:
Sector number
(hexadecimal number)
* As this is user
information, the
settings cannot be
output via list
printing.
KP-2005: <RRBSEbse
(hexadecimal number)>
RR:00 (Fixed)
B: 1st area block
number
S: 1st area beginning
byte offset
E: 1st area ending byte
offset
b: 2nd area block
number
s: 2nd area beginning
byte offset
e: 2nd area ending
byte offset
<Default>
e-STUDIO205L: 4
e-STUDIO255: 4
e-STUDIO305: 4
e-STUDIO355: 2
e-STUDIO455: 2
<Default>
e-STUDIO205L: 8
e-STUDIO255: 8
e-STUDIO305: 8
e-STUDIO355: 9
e-STUDIO455: 9
2987 Image Cleaning bias output ALL e- M The transfer cleaning 1
processi correction between STUDIO205L bias is output between
ng sheets of paper /255/305:110 sheets of paper during
e- printing so as to prevent
STUDIO355/ the toner on the
455:104 photoconductive drum
<0~255> from adhering to the
transfer roller. This
code is used to correct
the output between
sheets of paper to that
adjusted in 05-2084
(Transfer cleaning bias
adjustment (negative)).
The larger the setting
value is, the higher the
value of the current
(more negative) is. This
causes a reduction in
the toner adhering
between sheets of
paper. Note that toner
with a different polarity
will adhere easily if the
setting value is too
large. (Recommended
range: 125 to 138)
3015 Scanner Pre-scan setting ALL 0 SYS 0: Not performing pre- 1
switchover <0-1> scanning
1: Performing pre-
scanning
3508 General Maximum number of ALL 0 SYS 0: 1000 records 1
records in address book <0~1> 1: 3000 records
3612 General Date of unpacking ALL - SYS Year/month/date/day/ 11
<13 digits> hour/minute/second
Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
“Day” - “0” is for
“Sunday”. Proceeds
Monday through
Saturday from “1” to “6”.
Procedure:
1. Set 08-201.
2. Perform 08-9090.
3. Perform 08-4581.
4. Set 08-203 to "0".
1: Disable (Default)
2: Enable
9749 Network WIA Scan Driver SCN 1 NIC Selects WIA Scan 12
<1-2> Driver.
1: TTEC
2: Microsoft
9791 Network FTP data cloning setting ALL 1 SYS 1: Enabled 1
<1-2> 2: Disabled
Pixel counter
1. Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size” is called Pixel
count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Ex.)
“1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
“2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
“1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
“1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
Note:
In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
Ex.)
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
→ Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
→ Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
: With data
⎯: Without data
Toner cartridge reference Service technician reference
Copier function
Printer function
FAX function
Total
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data
X/2
X/10
6% 12% 60%
Pixel count (%)
Fig. 2-14 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above
and the power is, as usual, turned ON.
The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
2004.7.11 09:55
TONERCARTRIDGE
2004.7.11 09:55
SERVICEMAN
2
No DATE PPC PRN FAX TOTAL
0 20040711 Print Count [LT/A4] 12345 23456 12345 45678
1 20040711 Average Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 12345 45678
2 20040711 Latest Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 12345 45678
Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed
dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. (08-1566)
© 2009 - 2012 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
2 - 211
Toner cartridge reference count started date
The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. (08-1518)
Sub-codes 2
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
PM management
Date of previous
setting <Procedure
Items replacement Remarks
4> *Indicated in 8
<Procedure 2>
digits
Photoconductive drum 1150-0 to 8 1151 <Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/100,000/120,000/
125,000/150,000
Sub-code 4: 161,000/161,000/161,000/
135,000/135,000
Drum cleaning blade 1158-0 to 8 1159 <Default values of code 1158
(e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/100,000/120,000/
125,000/150,000
Sub-code 4: 161,000/161,000/161,000/
135,000/135,000
Drum separation finger 1172-0 to 8 1173 <Default values of code 1172
(e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/100,000/120,000/
125,000/150,000
Sub-code 4: 161,000/161,000/161,000/
135,000/135,000
Charger grid 1174-0 to 8 1175 <Default values of code 1174
(e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/100,000/120,000/
125,000/150,000
Sub-code 4: 161,000/161,000/161,000/
135,000/135,000
Charger (Wire) 1182-0 to 8 1183 <Default values of code 1182
(e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/100,000/120,000/
125,000/150,000
Sub-code 4: 161,000/161,000/161,000/
135,000/135,000
Ozone filter 1198-0 to 8 1199 <Default values of code 1198
(e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 240,000/200,000/240,000/
250,000/300,000
Sub-code 4: 483,000/322,000/322,000/
270,000/270,000
Developer material 1200-0 to 8 1201 <Default values of code 1200
(e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/100,000/120,000/
125,000/150,000
Sub-code 4: 161,000/161,000/161,000/
135,000/135,000
Parts to be replaced
Developer material Photoconductive drum Laser optical unit
Transfer roller Drum cleaning blade
Main charger grid
Adjust the image quality if necessary. (Chapter 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7 )
END
Fig. 3-1
(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
The following message will be displayed.
100% A A3
[0][5] TEST MODE
[POWER]
Fig. 3-2
230% 200 A3
[200] [START] TEST MODE
128 128
C A
Fig. 3-3
Notes:
• A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output. Press the Up or Down button
to change the value.
• B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.
• C indicates the latest adjustment value.
(4) After about two minutes, the value B automatically starts changing.
230% 200 A3
TEST MODE WAIT
128 128
Fig. 3-4
240% 200 A3
ADJUSTMENT MODE
128 150
A 3
Fig. 3-5
(6) Check if the value B is within the range of 234 to 246 (the output voltage range of the auto-toner
sensor is 2.34 V to 2.46 V).
(7) If the value B is not within the range of 234 to 246, press the Up or Down button to adjust the
value manually.
Note:
The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows.
Button to be pressed Value A Value B
Up Increased Increased
[ENTER]
100% A A3
or TEST MODE
[INTERRUPT]
Fig. 3-6
1 Paper alignment at the registration roller 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469,
470, 471, 472, 473, 474
(d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start 441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445
position
100% A A3 3
0 5 TEST MODE
POWER
1
Digital keys : Enter codes. Code No.
100% XXX A3
START
TEST MODE
Digital keys : Enter adjustment YYY ZZZ Adjustment value newly entered
values. (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
( CLEAR Use to make corrections) Current adjustment value
Fig. 3-7
Plain 64 - 80 g/m2 450 (*1) 452 (*1) 448 (*1) 449 (*1) 457 455 (*1) 458 (*1)
paper 17 - 20 lb. Bond
Thick 81 - 105g/m2 469 (*1) 470 (*1) 471 (*1) 472 (*1) 473 474 (*1) 460 (*1)
paper 1 21 - 28 lb. Bond
Sub-code
(*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size
(*2) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size 3: Post card
(*3) 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size of OHP film
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220-239 mm (8.7-12.9 inches)
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of “Post card” is for Japan only.
<Procedure>
Fig. 3-8
Note:
When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration
section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount.
However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge
position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while
confirming the leading edge position is not shifted.
* As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by 3
increasing the aligning amount.
D
6
10
Feeding direction
C
30
Adjustment
Detail of adjustment
Tolerance
A 200 ± 0.5mm P.3-9 "[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of
polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))"
B 52 ± 0.5mm P.3-9 "[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)"
C 200 ± 0.5mm P.3-10 "[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine
adjustment of main motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer))"
D 52 ± 0.5mm P.3-11 "[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position"
E 52 ± 0.5mm P.3-12 "[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing"
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer (Refer to *).
3
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance A from the 1st line
to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer (Refer to *).
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance B from the left edge
of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer (Refer to *).
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance C from the 10th
line at the leading edge of the paper to the 30th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance D from the leading
edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer (Refer to *).
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
A Feeding direction B
Step 1
Feeding direction
C D
Step 2
Fig. 3-10
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the lower drawer (Refer to *).
3
(4) Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [405]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the
distance A become (approx. 0.125 mm/step).
250
200
A
100
50
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-13
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the lower drawer (Refer to *).
(4) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-14
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the lower drawer (Refer to *). 3
(4) Measure the distance C from 200 mm to 400 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-15
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the lower drawer (Refer to *).
(4) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
10 20 30 40
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-16
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the lower drawer
(Refer to *). 3
(4) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 ± 0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-17
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the lower drawer
(Refer to *).
(4) Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-18
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(3) Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the lower drawer
(Refer to *). 3
(4) Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-19
(1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this
adjustment:
• Photoconductive drum • Developer material • Laser optical unit
• Transfer roller • Drum cleaning blade
• Main charger grid • SRAM board
(2) Be sure to perform this adjustment when changing the system ROM.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → Adjustment Mode
(2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in “10” and press the [FAX] button to print a “Patch chart for gamma
adjustment”.
(3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass. Place the
chart aligning its black side of the gradation pattern against the original scale.
(4) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown. Press the [ENTER] button to
have the adjustment results reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown.
Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display
will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the
wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and
afterward.
505 506 507 934 - Manual density mode light The larger the value is, the
step value lighter the light side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 20)
508 509 510 937 - Manual density mode dark The larger the value is, the
step value darker the dark side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 20)
514 512 515 940 7129 Automatic density mode The larger the value is, the
darker the image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
(5) Press the [FAX] button and then the [START] button. Then perform test copying.
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
7033 7043 7034 7279 7050 Automatic density mode The larger the value is, the
lighter the background becomes.
7041 7048 7042 7280 7051 Manual density mode Acceptable values:0 to 255
(Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".
Original mode
604 606 605 922 7059 Sharpness adjustment The larger the value is, the
sharper the image becomes;
while the smaller the value is, the
softer the
image becomes. The smaller the
value is, the less moire tends to
appear.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".
7283 7285 7284 7236 7289 Automatic density mode 0: Background peak / fixed
1: Background peak / varied
7286 7288 7287 7237 7290 Manual density mode
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".
648 649 925 Adjustment of smudged/ When the value increases, the smudged text is
faint spotted text improved.
When the value decreases, the faint text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 2)
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet
the standard when the setting value is
changed from the default value.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".
590-0 592-0 591-0 949-0 7193-0 Low density The larger the value is, the density of the
item to be adjusted becomes darker.
590-1 592-1 591-1 949-1 7193-1 Medium density Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default:
128)
590-2 592-2 591-2 949-2 7193-2 High density
Note:
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and
high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the code for an item to be adjusted and then press the [START] button.
(3) Key in a number for the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2), and then press the [START]
button.
0: Low density 1: Medium density 2: High density
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(7) Press the [FAX] button and then the [START] button. Then perform test copying.
(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
667-0 to 4 Adjustment of image density When the value is decreased, text becomes lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
1. Set not to reverse the large and small
number of the setting value corresponding
3
to the sub code.
Ex.) When the image density level for 667-0,
667-1, 667-2, 667-3, and 667-4 is assumed
to be "A","B", "C", "D", and "E" respectively,
they should have the following correlation:
A B C D E
2. Remember that the image specifications
and life span of the replacing parts may not
meet the standard when the setting value is
changed from the default value.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the code “667” and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(7) Press the [FAX] button and then the [START] button. Then perform test copying.
(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".
654 655 656 When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value
decreases, the faint text is improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job.
(6) If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
Hardcopy Item to be
Remarks
General Toner save security adjusted
printing
672-0 to 4 7352-0 to 4 7351-0 to 4 Adjustment of When the value is decreased, text becomes 3
image density lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
1. Set not to reverse the large and
small number of the setting value
corresponding to the sub code.
Ex.) When the image density
level for 672-0, 672-1, 672-2,
672-3, and 672-4 is assumed to
be "A","B", "C", "D", and "E"
respectively, they should have the
following correlation:
A B C D E
2. Remember that the image
specifications and life span of the
replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value
is changed from the default value.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(3) Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(7) Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job.
(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
Note:
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and
high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density 1: Medium density 2: High density
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. → The equipment
goes back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Then perform printing.
(8) If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
880-0 881-0 882-0 7480-0 883-0 Low density The larger the value is, the density of the
item to be adjusted becomes darker.
880-1 881-1 882-1 7480-1 883-1 Medium density Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
880-2 881-2 882-2 7480-2 883-2 High density
Note:
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and
high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L), 1: Medium density (M), 2: High density (H)
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Then perform scanning.
(8) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
Color 8340 8341 8342 8380 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the image
center value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
8344 8345 8346 8381 Manual density Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the
light step value density adjustment on the control panel.
The larger the value is, the lighter the light
side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20)
8348 8349 8350 8382 Manual density Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the
dark step value density adjustment on the control panel.
The larger the value is, the darker the dark
side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20)
845 846 847 7475 848 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the image
center value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
860 861 862 7478 863 Automatic density (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).
(To correct a value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(5) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Then perform scanning.
(6) If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
<Procedure>:
The procedure is the same as that of P.3-32 "3.6.2 Density adjustment".
Note:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P.3-32 "3.6.2 Density adjustment".
7416 7417 7418 7425 7419 Range correction 0: Background peak - fixed
(Automatic density 1: Background peak - varied
adjustment)
Color
Original mode
Item to be adjusted Remarks
Printed User
Text Photo
Image custom
8330 8331 8332 8334 Range correction (Automatic 0: Background peak - fixed
density adjustment) 1: Background peak - varied
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P.3-32 "3.6.2 Density adjustment".
Before adjustment +2 +1 0 -1 -2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3
After adjustment +2 +1 0 -1 -2
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P.3-32 "3.6.2 Density adjustment".
Note:
Be careful for the value not to be too large since the gradation is reproduced worse in darker
side.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P.3-32 "3.6.2 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P.3-32 "3.6.2 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P.3-32 "3.6.2 Density adjustment".
Original mode
Item to be adjusted Remarks
Text/ User Gray
Photo
Photo Custom Scale
3
8400 8402 8404 8403 Background density The larger the value is, the lower
adjustment the density of the image
/ Automatic density background (low density section)
adjustment becomes.The smaller the value
is, the higher the density of the
8405 8407 8409 8408 Background density image background (low density
adjustment section) becomes.Acceptable
/ Manual density values: 0 to 255
adjustment (Default: 128)
Color
Original mode
Item to be adjusted Remarks
Printed User
Text Photo
Image Custom
8385 8386 8387 8389 Background density The larger the value is, the lower
adjustment the density of the image
/ Automatic density background (low density section)
adjustment becomes.The smaller the value
is, the higher the density of the
8390 8391 8392 8394 Background density image background (low density
adjustment section) becomes.
/ Manual density Acceptable values: 0 to 255
adjustment (Default: 128)
RADF
Black/ Item to be
Remarks
Gray Color adjusted
Scale
7468 8395 Background Adjusts the density of background for RADF scanning. The
density processing larger the value is, the lower the density of the background
/ RADF scanning and the low density section (e.g. light text or lines)
becomes. The smaller the value is, the higher the density
of them becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P.3-32 "3.6.2 Density adjustment".
* Since the gradation in this mode is reproduced in a binary image (black and white), this adjustment
should be a simple binary threshold adjustment.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. → The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
(5) To set it again, repeat step (2) to (4).
(6) Turn the power OFF.
<Confirmation>
If possible, perform a Fax transmission and check the adjusted density with the image on the recipient's
side.
678-0 to 4 Adjustment of image density When the value is decreased, text becomes lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
1. Set not to reverse the large and small
number of the setting value corresponding
3
to the sub code.
Ex.) When the image density level for 667-0,
678-1, 678-2, 678-3, and 678-4 is assumed
to be "A","B", "C", "D", and "E" respectively,
they should have the following correlation:
A B C D E
2. Remember that the image specifications
and life span of the replacing parts may not
meet the standard when the setting value is
changed from the default value.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(3) Key in the sub code and press the [START] button.
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
<Confirmation>
If possible, perform a Fax transmission and check the adjusted density with the image on the recipient's
side.
3.8.1 Adjustment
[ 1 ] Preparation
Transfer Bias,
Transfer Cleaning
Separation
Items to check Developer Bias Main Charger Bias(positive),
Charger
Transfer Cleaning
Bias(negative)
Process Unit Take the process unit out of the equipment, an then install the high-voltage transformer
jig to the unit.
Digital (+) terminal Connect with the Connect with the Connect with the red Connect with the
Tester black cable (thick red cable (thick cable (thin line) of the gray cable of the
line) of the high- line) of the high- high-voltage high-voltage
voltage voltage transformer jig. transformer jig.
transformer jig. transformer jig.
(–) terminal Connect with the black cable (thin line) of the high-voltage transformer jig.
Function DC
switch
Full-scale 1000 V 20 V
(range)
Remarks Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 MΩ (RMS value) or higher.
How to turn ON Attach the door switch jig and start with the adjustment mode [05] while the front cover
the power opened.
Harness Adapter
Red cable (thick line)
Screw
Disconnect 1 connector
Fig. 3-20
Process unit
Fig. 3-21
Process unit
Fig. 3-22
Fig. 3-23
Fig. 3-24
3
(+) terminal:
Connect with the
black cable (thick )
Front cover switch
(-) terminal:
Connect with the black cable (thin)
Fig. 3-25
(+) terminal:
Connect with the
red cable (thick )
Front cover switch
(-) terminal:
Connect with the black cable (thin)
Fig. 3-26
(+) terminal:
Connect with the
Front cover opening/closing switch red cable (thin )
(-) terminal:
Connect with the black cable (thin)
Fig. 3-27
(-) terminal:
Front cover opening/closing switch Connect with the
black cable (thin)
(+) terminal:
Connect with the
gray cable
Fig. 3-28
Connect the digital testers as described in “[1] Preparation”, and follow the procedure on the next
page to adjust the output from the main charger, developer bias charger, transfer charger and
separation charger. 3
<Keys to press> <Display>
[0][5] 100% A A3
[POWER]
TEST MODE
TEST MODE
[START]
YYY
Current set value
[UP] or [DOWN]: Adjust the value “YYY” to satisfy the following table.
Adjustment value
Item Code
e-STUOIO205L/255/305 e-STUOIO355/455
Transfer cleaning
2083 1000 55mV 1800 55mV
bias(positive)
Transfer cleaning
2084 -322 55mV -322 55mV
bias(negative)
[SET] : Adjusted value “YYY” is stored in memory.
or
[INTERRUPT] 100% A A3
TEST MODE
Return to 1 to enter
the other adjustment
code.
[POWER] : OFF/ON
Fig. 3-29
[ 1 ] Developer bias
Note for adjustment
Adjust the developer bias if fogging occurs over the entire image even though the main charger grid
voltage and toner density are appropriate. However, the following may occur if the developer bias is
lowered too much:
• Image contrast becomes low.
• Image is patchy or blurred.
• The carrier in the developer material adheres to the photoconductive drum, causing scratches
around the cleaner.
[ 2 ] Transfer
Items to check before adjustment
Blotched image or poor transfer can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of
transfer output. Check the following items before adjusting the transfer charger. If there is no problem,
adjust the output of the transfer.
• Are the transfer roller unit, transfer roller and power supply spring properly installed? Is there any
foreign matter or damage on the transfer roller surface? Is the transfer guide deformed?
• Is the process unit properly installed? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum?
Is the process unit worked correctly? Is the toner density low?
• Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?
• Is the rotation of the registration roller normal?
• Is the separation output different from the set value?
• Is the developer bias value an appropriate one?
3.9.1 Carriages
[Front side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Tension spring
Fig. 3-30
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Idler pulley
Hook
Wire pulley
Tension spring
Fig. 3-31
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the
carriage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
(2) Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage-
2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
B A
Fig. 3-32
(3) Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit
side frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[Rear] [Front]
Bracket
Bracket
Fig. 3-33
(1) Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end
of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
(2) Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
• 3 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
• 3 turns toward the boss side
Note:
Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
- Do not twist the wire.
- Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
- Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space
between them.
3 turns 3 turns
3 turns 3 turns
Hook
Hook
[Rear] [Front]
Fig. 3-34
Notes:
• When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.
• The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed through between the
arm and the jig.
3
Arm
Fig. 3-35
Fig. 3-36
• Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).
Fig. 3-37
(1) Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LT-
sized paper at 100% reproduction ratio.
3
(2) Compare the copied ruler with the actual
ruler. Feeding Direction
Fig. 3-38
(3) If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.
<Procedure>
Lens unit
Fig. 3-39
0.1% 0.5 mm
0.2% 0.9 mm
0.3% 1.4 mm
0.4% 1.8 mm
0.5% 2.3 mm
0.6% 2.7 mm
0.7% 3.2 mm
0.8% 3.6 mm
0.9% 4.1 mm
1.0% 4.5 mm
Lens unit
Fig. 3-40
Note:
Fine adjustment can be made in the “Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer)”.
on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
(5) Attach the lens cover and original glass. Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio.
(6) Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
[Rear] [Rear]
[Front] [Front]
Bypass feeding
(A) (B)
Fig. 3-43
Stopper
Fig. 3-44
Fig. 3-45
Fig. 3-46
Screw
3
Fig. 3-47
(B) (A)
Fig. 3-48
(3) Take out the developer unit from the process unit.
Fig. 3-49
Fig. 3-50
Toner scattering
prevention sheet
Fig. 3-51
Developer
sleeve
Fig. 3-52
Side seal
Toner scattering
prevention sheet
Fig. 3-53
Fig. 3-54
Rubber seal
Developer unit
upper cover
Fig. 3-55
Fig. 3-56
Fig. 3-57
Fig. 3-58
Fig. 3-59
Fig. 3-60
Fig. 3-61
Fig. 3-62
Fig. 3-63
Fig. 3-64
Fig. 3-65
Fig. 3-66
Fig. 3-67
Fig. 3-68
[A] Checking
0 mm
A A
B B
Fig. 3-69
Fig. 3-70
• Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwise .................. Lowered
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Heightened
Fig. 3-71
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Simplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
Duplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-73
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of
"+", and if "D", shift it to "-".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+". Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-76
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-
", and if "D", shift it to "+".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-". Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Simplex copying:
3
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
Duplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
E F
Simplex copying:
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [365] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.2 mm.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.2 mm.
Duplex copying:
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [366] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.2 mm.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.2 mm.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure.
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
3
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.
[B] Adjustment
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [358] and then press the [START] button.
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value
larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.
Fig. 3-81
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value
smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.
Fig. 3-82
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension “I”.
[B] Adjustment
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [357] and then press the [START] button.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than
the current one.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than
the current one.
I
Fig. 3-83
A
Fig. 3-84
Fig. 3-85
<Procedure>
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-86
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
(4) Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the finisher controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0.16 mm.
• To move the folding position in the “-” direction, press the PSW1.
• To move the folding position in the “+” direction, press the PSW2.
• Pressing the PSW1 and PSW2 at the same time clears the adjustment value.
- direction + direction
Fig. 3-87
(5) When adjustment of the folding position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the finisher
controller PCB to OFF.
(6) Enter the bind mode of the host machine and check whether the folding position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the folding position again.
<Procedure>
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-88
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
(4) Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the punch controller PCB. A press will automatically adjust the
sensor output.
• The adjustment is over when all LEDs on the punch controller PCB are ON: LED 1001,
LED1002, LED1003.
<Procedure>.
(2) Set bits of 1 through 4 on the DIPSW1001 on the punch controller PCB as follows:
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-89
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
(4) Press SW1002 on the punch controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes.
• Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following (repeatedly from top to
bottom).
(5) Press SW1003 on the punch controller PCB twice. The presses will store the selected number of
punch holes on the punch controller PCB.
• A single press on SW1003 will cause the LED indication to flash; another press on SW1003
will cause the indication to remain ON to indicate the end of registration.
ON
3
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-90
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
(4) Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the punch controller PCB at the same time.
• The presses will initialize the EEPROM. At the end, all LEDs (LED1001, LED1002, LED1003)
will go ON.
(5) Adjust the sensor output, and store the number of punch holes.
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4 paper LT paper
Fig. 3-91
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4/front stitch A4/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4-R/front stitch A4-R/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LT/front stitch LT/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LT-R/front stitch LT-R/rear stitch
Fig. 3-92
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
(1) Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine. If the optional 3
puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher.
(2) Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller
PC board as follows:
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Do not change bits 5 through 8.
Fig. 3-93
(3) Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of
inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1).
(4) Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD
paper.
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig. 3-94
(5) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
(6) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board so that the feed motor (M1) starts to rotate.
(Press SW1 three seconds or more if LD paper is used.)
(7) Open the inlet cover and insert two sheets of paper. Push them in by hand until the front edge of
the sheets push against the paper positioning plate.
(8) Close the inlet cover.
(9) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
• The saddle stitcher unit will “stitch” the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically.
Mark Mark
L
L
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm". Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".
Fig. 3-95
(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table.
• If the width adjustment is 0
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
• If for “positive width adjustment”
Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the
appropriate setting in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2.
• If for “negative width adjustment”
Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting
in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.
DIPSW1 bit settings Setting
Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 (in units of 0.5 mm)
OFF ON ON +3
OFF ON OFF +2
OFF OFF ON +1
OFF OFF OFF 0
ON OFF ON -1
ON ON OFF -2
ON ON ON -3
Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A".
3
Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B".
A: When the upper side of the folding B: When the upper side of the folding is
is longer than the lower side shorter than the lower side
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-97
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when
the switch is pressed.
• Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks
alternately.
(5) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
(6) Turn OFF the power.
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON 3
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-98
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board to select the number of punch holes.
• The items in the following table are displayed repeatedly from top to bottom each time SW602
is pressed.
Number of punch holes LED601/LED602
2 hole (E) Blinks 1 times per cycle
2/3 hole (N) Blinks 2 times per cycle
4 hole (F) Blinks 3 times per cycle
4 hole (S) Blinks 4 times per cycle
(5) Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the
punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed.
• Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks
alternately.
(6) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
(7) Turn OFF the power.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-99
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-100
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
The alignment plate moves to the A4 or LT size position and stops.
(It stops at the position of -5 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-101
(6) When the adjustment is completed, press the [Button2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory.
When the value is stored normally, the [LED1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times the [LED1] blinks and its corresponding
adjustment value.
(8) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-102
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-103
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
The alignment plate moves to the rear or front side stapling position and stops. (It stops at the
position of -20 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-104
(6) When the adjustment is completed, press [Button 2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray.
When the value is stored normally, [LED 1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times [LED 1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment
value.
(8) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-105
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-106
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Note:
Be sure to press [Button1] and [Button2] the correct number of times.
Press [Button1] and [Button2] simultaneously to cancel the operation.
3
LED3 LED2 LED1
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-107
1 Button1 1
3 Button1 8
Note:
To change settings from the B4-size recycled paper mode to the normal mode, perform steps (1)
through (4), and then press [Button1] and [Button2] on the control panel as shown below to set
the normal mode.
Normal mode
Step Buttons Number of pressing Remarks
1 Button1 1
3 Button1 6
(6) When the settings are stored normally, [LED1] on the control panel is lit. [LED1] blinks, if an error
occurs. In this case, turn the power OFF and make the settings again from step (4).
(8) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
[ 1 ] Adjusting procedure
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
SW1
Fig. 3-108
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed
simultaneously.
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-109
<Setting list>
Mode name Setting code
Normal paper mode 1
Recycled paper mode 3
* Example of operation
If you want to select the normal paper mode, the number of Setting code is "1”.
Therefore press [Button1] 11 times and then press [Button2] once. Then press [Button1] once
and then press [Button2] once. This selects the normal paper mode.
<Setting list>
Model name Setting code
e-STUDIO352/452 8
e-STUDIO353/453
e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c 9
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C
e-STUDIO2040C/2540C/3540C/4540C
e-STUDIO281/351/451 10
e-STUDIO283/353/453
* Example of operation
If you want to select e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c, the number of Setting code is "9".
Therefore press [Button1] 11 times and then press [Button2] once. Then press [Button1] 9 times and
then press [Button2] once. This selects e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c.
<Setting list>
Paper type Setting code
Plain paper 4
Thick paper 1 5
Thick paper 2 6
Thick paper 3 7
* Example of operation
If you want to select the plain paper, the number of Setting code is "4”.
Therefore press [Button1] 11 times and the press [Button2] once. Then press [Button1] 4
times and then press [Button2] once. This selects plain paper.
(1) Check the setting list and press [Button1] as many times as noted for Setting code No.1 whose
paper size you want to select, and then press [Button2] once. Then check the setting list and
press [Button1] as many times as noted for Setting code No.2 whose paper size you want to
select, then press [Button2] once.
<Setting list>
Paper size Setting code No. 1 Setting code No. 2 3
Others 12 1
A3 12 2
A4 12 3
A4-R 12 4
A5 12 5
A5-R 12 6
A6-R 12 7
B4 12 8
B5 12 9
B5-R 13 1
FOLIO 13 2
LD 13 3
LG 13 4
LT 13 5
LT-R 13 6
ST 13 7
ST-R 13 8
COMP 13 9
13”LG 14 1
8.5”SG 14 2
8K 14 3
16K 14 4
16K-R 14 5
A3 wide 14 7
The default settings of the number of LED blinking times in the mode setting, media type and
paper size, which are set in [B] and [C], are shown in the table below. When A3 and plain paper
with the normal paper mode are set in [B] and [C], the number of LED blinking times is 2.
(2) Press [Button1] for the number of LED blinking times you want to set.
Note:
The larger the number you set is, the faster the paper exiting speed becomes.
The smaller the number you set is, the slower the paper exiting speed becomes.
After changing the setting, check the number of LED blinking times.Normally, the number of LED
blinking times is increased by 1 from the default. If paper trailing edge still remains, increase the
number by 2 from the default.
*Example of operation
To change the number of LED blinking times from 2 to 3, press [Button1] three times.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
SW1
Fig. 3-110
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while pressing the [0] button and the [8] button
simultaneously.
(7) Check the following list and press [Button1] as many times as noted for Adjustment value
whose switching timing you want to select.
*The number of blinking times is set to "1" as a default.
If you want to change the adjustment value from "1" to "3", press [Button1] 3 times.
ON SW1 ON SW1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
3
Fig. 3-111
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
SW1
Fig. 3-112
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while pressing the [0] button and the [8] button
simultaneously.
(5) Press [Button1] 11 times, press [Button2] once, press [Button1] 11 times , and then press
[Button2] once.
(8) Turn OFF all bits of SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown below.
ON SW1 ON SW1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-113
Since adjustment has usually been performed when the equipment was manufactured, dogleg image
should not occur. However, if the following dogleg image A or B does happen to occur, the following
adjustment must be performed. An original with a line parallel to the feeding direction is used for the
adjustment.
3
Normal Image
Feeding
Direction
Fig. 3-114
Feeding Feeding
Direction Direction
Approx. 48 mm of Approx. 48 mm of
the trailing edge the trailing edge
C
B
Fig. 3-117
Fig. 3-118
• Dogleg image B
Perform adjustment so that the stay of the
fuser unit comes above the center line of A
the scale.
Fig. 3-119
4.1.2 Precautions
1. Programs required for data cloning are as follows:
Note:
In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder
Version: Vxxxx.xx x
Serial Number: 0123456789
Date: MON MAR 17 18:34:40 2008
4
Fig. 4-1
(2) Connect the USB media to the USB port on the right upper cover.
USB port
USB media
Fig. 4-2
Note:
Backing up cannot be performed with multiple USB media connected at the same time.
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] buttons simultaneously.
A screen for selecting items to back up is displayed. Select the number (any of “1”, “3” and “5” for
the item to be backed up, and then press the [START] button.
Fig. 4-3
Notes:
• It may take some time for the next screen to appear after you key in the number for the item.
• The screen above is not displayed if the data cloning function is disabled.In this case, ask the
user (machine administrator) to enable the data cloning function on the TopAccess menu.
• To clear the selection, press the [CLEAR] or [FUNCTION CLEAR] button.
* The items “4”, “5”, “6”, and “7” are selected in the screen by default.
Fig. 4-4
Fig. 4-5
Fig. 4-6
(5) Press the [START] button. The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD
screen.
(6) “Back Up Completed” is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly
completed.
(7) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB media.
(2) Connect the USB media to the USB port on the right upper cover.
USB port
USB media
Fig. 4-7
Note:
Restoring cannot be performed with multiple USB medias connected simultaneously.
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] buttons simultaneously.
A screen for selecting items to restore is displayed. Select the number (any of “2”, “4” and “6” for
the item to be restore, and then press the [START] button.
Fig. 4-8
Notes:
• It may take some time for the next screen to appear after you key in the number for the item.
• The screen above is not displayed if the data cloning function is disabled. In this case, ask the
user (machine administrator) to enable the data cloning function on the TopAccess menu, or
set "0 (Accepted)" in 08-9889.
• To clear the selection, press the [CLEAR] or [FUNCTION CLEAR] button.
* The items “4”, “5”, “6”, and “7” are selected in the screen by default.
Fig. 4-9
Fig. 4-10
Fig. 4-11
(5) Press the [START] button. The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD
screen.
(6) “Restore Completed” is displayed on the LCD screen when restoring has been properly
completed.
(7) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB media.
* When “department management data” or “user management data” are restored, clear their counter
values in a procedure below.
(8) Counter values can be all cleared as the data are copied. Note that the total counter values are
not copied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [COUNTER] [DEPARTMANT MANAGEMENT] Enter the
password [RESET ALL COUNTERS]
* Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] buttons is set to be
disabled.
Fig. 4-12
* When data cloning is performed in the following conditions, "ERROR12: Device is Busy" appears.
Back Up Restore
Control panel is in use Control panel is in use
JOB is in process JOB is in process
Private job has been reserved
Schedule print job has been reserved
Proof print job has been reserved
Hold print job has been reserved
Invalid job is pending
4.2.2 Precautions
When the data encryption function is set enabled, data currently stored in the HDD will not be retrieved.
Therefore when data encryption function needs to be enabled after the installation of the equipment, it
is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before setting this function and then recover them after the 4
setting.
• To ensure security, ask the user (machine administrator) to back up or restore the user’s data
and information in the HDD. A service technician can back up or restore them only when the
user (machine administrator) permits it.
• Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be left only on printouts.
Start
Setting completed
Fig. 4-13
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] tab.
(3) Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The “FUNCTION LIST FOR
MAINTENANCE” is printed out.
(2) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
(3) Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
(4) Press the [FUNCTION] button. The “FUNCTION” list is printed out.
Note:
Explain the procedure to the user (machine administrator) and ask him/her to enter his/her
password. 4
[D] Enable data encryption function
Perform the setting of the data encryption function in the code 08-9379. The setting values are shown
below.
0: Encryption disabled
1: Encryption enabled (Security priority)
2: Encryption enabled (Performance priority)
Security priority: All user data are encrypted.
Performance priority: Encryption data are generated only in a copying or a printing process temporarily.
All user data except files which are deleted in a corresponding process are encrypted.
When the FAX Unit (GD-1250) is installed, perform “Fax Set Up (1*-100)” and “Clearing the image data
(1*-102)”. Then turn the power OFF.
1. Turn the power ON while pressing the digital keys [1] and [*] simultaneously.
2. Key in [100] and then press the [START] button.
3. Key in [102] and then press the [START] button.
4. Turn the power OFF.
Country Name
State or Province Name
Locality Name
Oranization Name
Organizational Unit Name
Common Name
Email Address
CA certificate
User certificate
(1) Print out the "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE" after the HDD formatting.
P.4-14 "[B] Print out “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE”"
(2) While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
(3) Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
(2) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
(3) Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
(3) HDD partition creation (All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is
necessary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is
created in the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD is installed since all data in the
current HDD are erased by this operation.
(1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
• The following screen is displayed.
Fig. 4-14
(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
Note:
Explain the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter his/
her password.
5.2 PM Display 5
The [process unit (K)] explained below is a photoconductive drum or a cleaner unit which includes a
photoconductive drum. The [developer material (K)] explained below is a developer material or a
developer unit which includes a developer material. The [PM part other than the process unit] explained
below is a fuser roller or a fuser unit which includes a fuser roller.
For example, you can set the conditions of the PM display of the [process unit (K)] as follows.
PM display by specifying the 1. Key in "0" for 08-223 (Switching of output pages/driving
number of prints counts at PM [process unit (K)]).
2. Key in the value of the number of prints for the PM display
other than "0" for 08-251 (Setting value of PM counter
[process unit (K)]).
PM display by specifying the 1. Key in "1" for 08-223 (Switching of output pages/driving
driving time counts at PM [process unit (K)]).
2. Key in the value of the driving time for the PM display other
than "0" for 08-375 (Setting value of PM time counter [process
unit (K)]).
PM display by the earlier one: 1. Key in "2" for 08-223 (Switching of output pages/driving
when the number of prints or the counts at PM [process unit (K)]).
driving time reaches the set value 2. Key in the value of the number of sheets for the PM display
other than "0" for 08-251 (Setting value of PM counter
[process unit (K)]).
3. Key in the value of the driving time other than "0" for 08-375
(Setting value of PM time counter [process unit (K)]).
If the value of 08-9891 (Warning message on the touch panel when PM time has come) is set to "0: No
warning notification", the PM display is not performed regardless of the settings above. (Default value is
"1: Display warning notification")
If multiple parts have reached the maintenance time, the sum of the corresponding code values listed
above is displayed in hexadecimal numbers.
For example, if the peripheral parts of the process units (K) and developer material (K) reach the
maintenance time, the 4-digit hexadecimal number code will be “0188” in hexadecimal numbers:
0008+0080+0100=0188.
5
• 08-5576: Current value of PM counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
• 08-5577: Current value of PM time counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
When the current value of “FUSER” on the main screen or “FUSER ROLLER” on the sub screen in
the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.
Note:
The following counters are cleared by executing the EPU replacement mode.
08-252: Current value of PM counter [process unit (K)]
08-376: Current value of PM time counter [process unit (K)]
08-5568: Current value of PM counter [developer material (K)]
08-5569: Current value of PM time counter [developer material (K)]
(1) Preparation
• Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
• Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
• See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S-
2) or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S-2 : [6] + [START] + [POWER] ON [2] [START]
5
9S-103 : [9] + [START] + [POWER] ON [103] [START]
Fig. 5-1
• Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
[ 1 ] Operational flow
Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig. 5-2
* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
10
1
5
9 6 7 8
2 3 4 5
Fig. 5-3
2. Sub screen
4 5 6 7
2 3
Fig. 5-4
5 Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x 1,000) to replace the sub unit
(parts)
7 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x 1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)
8 Displaying of the number of output pages counts, drive counts and previous replacement date
for a chosen sub unit
Fig. 5-5
1 When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of output pages counts” and
“Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.
Upper drawer [1st CST.] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (1st CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (1st CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (1st CST.)]
Lower drawer [2nd CST.] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
PFP upper drawer [3rd CST.] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (3rd CST.)]]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
PFP lower drawer [4th CST.] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (4th CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (4th CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (4th CST.)]
Example 1:
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
5
• The parts in RADF • The parts in the drum/cleaner unit
• The parts in feeding system • The parts in the fuser unit
• The parts in the developer unit
• The parts in the transfer unit
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified
level
Advance preparation
A4/LT size papers need to be loaded in the cassette for automatic gamma adjustment. Before
performing the EPU replacement mode, load the A4/LT size papers into the cassette, then set the
cassette paper size.
Rewrites IC chip
"New" -> "Used"
Clears counters of
consumables in the EPU
Press [OK].
Press [OK].
Fig. 5-6
5.5.4 Precautions
• When the power is turned ON in the normal mode or during warming-up in the normal mode, the
error code C3D1 appears after a new EPU unit (with new IC chip data) is installed. This indicates
that the installed EPU unit has not been set up. Turn the power OFF and then back ON while
pressing the digital key [7] and the [START] button simultaneously. Then the equipment enters
the EPU replacing mode.
• When the power is turned ON while pressing the digital key [7] and the [START] button
simultaneously, the error code C3D2 appears after an old EPU unit (with old IC chip data) is
installed. This is for preventing the equipment from detecting that the installed unit is a new one
and performing wrong operations such as supply item counter reset. In this case, turn the power
OFF and then back ON in the normal mode. The equipment returns to its normal operations.
• If IC chip information is not written as “used IC chip” in step 1, an error (C3D0) is displayed. If it
occurs, perform the maintenance of each part according to the Troubleshooting.
• If you press [CANCEL] in step 3, the EPU replacement mode ends without automatic gamma
adjustment being performed.
• If [Adjustment error Press [OK] to perform the adjustment again or [CANCEL] to finish it.] is
displayed in step 4, this means that the automatic gamma adjustment has failed. Check that the
original is placed on the original glass in the correct direction, and press [OK] to start the
adjustment again. If you press [CANCEL], the adjustment is cancelled and the EPU replacement
mode ends.
• If automatic gamma adjustment is not performed in the EPU replacement mode, the default
gamma slope angle is used. To obtain optimal image quality, perform the adjustment according to
the procedure in the “Automatic gamma adjustment” in the chapter of "Image Quality
Adjustment."
• If the EPU replacement mode does not function, check that the value of 08-4556 (Detection
setting of new or old EPU) is set to "1: Enabled.” If this value is set to "0: Disabled", the EPU
replacement mode does not function.
(1) When replacing supply parts or the fuser unit at PM, install a new fuse in it.
Note:
If a fuser unit with an installed fuse is selected, replace that the fuse with a new one because it
will have been blown out.
5.6.4 Precautions
• When the counters are not cleared, though the fuser unit is new, check that the value of the code
08-4549 is set at "0". If the value is "1", change it to "0", turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Then check the counter values again.
08-4549 (Detection setting of new or old fuser unit) 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
• When the fuse is not blown out, though the fuser unit is new, a C4C0 error occurs. In this case,
replace the fuse and turn the power OFF and then back ON, or remove the fuse and clear the
counters in the PM support mode.
b a h f c g j
d e
Fig. 5-7
Note:
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be
scanned.
a
Fig. 5-8
f
l, m
g
h
a
b c
d
b
k
c
Fig. 5-9
* c. Separation roller
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote HP-300)
on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Registration roller
Grease
Pusher
Fig. 5-12
* j, l. Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive gears.
When disassembling the driving section and applying grease at PM, follow the notes as below.
Timing belt
Registration
roller (metal)
Registration
roller clutch Leaf spring
Registration roller clutch
Leaf spring Registration roller clutch
B A
D E
Registration
roller (metal) approx.50mm
Fig. 5-13
A: Do not apply grease to the installation section of the registration roller clutch. Wipe off any grease.
B: Do not wipe off the conductive grease applied to the contact section of the leaf spring and the
registration roller (metal).
C: Do not apply grease to gear teeth which contact the registration roller clutch gear.
D: Apply a blob of grease (the size of a rice grain) to the gear teeth of the registration roller clutch. Be
careful not to use too much.
E: Do not apply grease to the side of the registration roller clutch gear. Wipe off any grease.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying Molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of
Molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.
s m n b o p d c f e
g
k
i
h, l, r 5
a
q
Fig. 5-14
j Transfer guide B
* f. Recovery blade
Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade get
damaged.
When cleaning the inside of the cleaner unit, be careful of the following in order not to damage
the Mylar attached on the toner recovery auger:
• Do not use an air blower for cleaning (Use a vacuum cleaner).
• When using a vacuum cleaner, be careful not to hit the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner to
the Mylar.
• When rotating the toner recovery auger, rotate it only in the same direction as that for
transporting toner.
* h. Transfer roller
If there is damage on the roller, replace it even if the replacement time has not come.
* i. Separation needle
When cleaning the separation needle, be careful not to bend the needlepoint or leave lint on the
needlepoint. If removing the dust is difficult, use brush to remove it.
* j. Transfer guide
If there is paper dust in the whole transfer unit including the transfer guide, wipe them with a dry
cloth. If the transfer guide is removed, clean the wall inside the unit.
e
d
5
a
Fig. 5-15
* b. Developer material
After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment.
P.3-2 "3.2 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor"
* g. Oil seal
Mixer unit (Shafts of mixers 1, 2 and 3) 6 pcs.
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvanian No.2).
Oil seal
Fig. 5-16
a, g
h
c
f
e
b
d
Fig. 5-17
* a. Fuser roller
When replacing the fuser roller, apply small amount of grease on the inside of fuser roller
bearings.
* e. Thermistor
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is
replaced.
Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a new
one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.
d
c
[ e-STUDIO205L/255/305 ] [ e-STUDIO355/455 ]
Fig. 5-18
* c, d. e-STUDIO355/455 only
Fig. 5-19
a
b
b
5
c
b
Fig. 5-20
* c. Separation roller
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote HP-300)
on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
d a b
Fig. 5-23
b e
a
5
b
Fig. 5-24
* a. Idling roller
Apply one-rice-grain-amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to each part A in the figure
below.
Fig. 5-25
e
f
Fig. 5-26
A
Fig. 5-27
e h d c b a
f g i j 5
Fig. 5-28
Fig. 5-29
h b h a
c
d
e
5
f
Fig. 5-30
c d e g
b
f
a
n m
k
i j h
Fig. 5-31
c h i d
n
l
b
e
5
f
k g
a
j
Fig. 5-32
Fig. 5-33
Fig. 5-34
Fig. 5-35
Gear B
Gear A
Fig. 5-36
Fig. 5-37
1. Take off the metal shield plate. If the hole punch unit is installed, take it off beforehand.
2. Apply oil as follows through the opening which shows up when the metal shield plate has been
removed.
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the rack and
pinion gears which drive the aligning plate, and the entire finishing tray shaft.
Rack gear
Pinion gear
Fig. 5-38
2. Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
5. Paper
Avoid storing paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity. After a package is opened,
be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
6. Transfer roller
Transfer roller should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C
(no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where transfer roller may be subjected to high humidity,
chemicals and/or their fumes.
2. Handling precautions
As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when
installing and removing it so as not damage its surface.
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of
the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. When the drum has been replaced
with a new one, the drum counter (the Setting Mode 08-1150-0, 3, 6 and 7) must be cleared to 0
(zero).
This clearing can be performed in the PM Support Mode.
Notes:
• Application of patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning blade.
If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be
damaged.
• When paper fibers or thread adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning
efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers
found adhering to the blade.
2. Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
Note: 5
- Remove the cleaning and recovery blades before sucking the dirt from the cleaner.
- It should be cleaned by suction since the PET sheet attached to the toner recovery auger may
be damaged if air blowing is used. Be careful not to allow the suction nozzle to contact with the
PET sheet. This may damage the PET sheet.
- Pressure roller
Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller.
2. Checking
- Check for stain and damage on the fuser and pressure rollers, and clean if necessary.
- Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.
- Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller.
- Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.
- Check the gap between the entrance guide and pressure roller.
- Check the fuser roller for proper rotation.
3. Cleaning procedure
When fuser roller and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe
the surface clean with a piece of soft cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the roller white they are still
warm.
Note:
Be careful not to rub the fuser roller and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects
because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser roller and pressure roller.
2. Cleaning procedure
If bits of thread or similar adhere to the surface, remove them with gloves or a pair of tweezers. Be
careful that the roller surface is not damaged by the points of the tweezers.
5 Wire holder jig Fixing the wire at the assembly of the 101-5
carriage wire
10 ROM writer adapter (For 1881) Writing the data of PWA-DWNLD-350- 102-4
JIG2
11 ROM writer adapter (For 1931) Writing the data of PWA-DWNLD-350- 102-5
JIG2
5
6 5
10 (Model 1881)
11 (Model 1931)
Fig. 5-39
When a trouble occurs, check if an error code is displayed on the LCD screen of the control panel first.
If displayed, refer to“6.2 Error Code List” to figure out the classification and contents of the error, and
then refer to “6.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code” to remove its cause.
If not displayed and the equipment does not operate properly or images are not printed properly, refer
to “6.4 Troubleshooting for the Image” to remove its cause.
The cause of a trouble in the equipment may be a minor failure. Check the items below first.
Note:
If unusual odor is detected or if smoke or fire comes out of the equipment, immediately turn the
power OFF.
Even in the cases other than the above, fully observe safety precautions.
If any PC board or HDD shall be replaced, refer to“7.1 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for
Replacing PC Boards and HDD”.
1. Serial Number
2. List Print
Refer to the appropriate Service Handbook for the detailed procedure to obtain a List Print
A. Enter the value given below to obtain a List Print by CSV file.
- 9S-300: All CSV files
B. Enter the value given below to obtain a List Print by printing it out.
- 9S-101: 05 code
- 9S-102: 08 code
- 9S-104: Pixel counter data (Toner cartridge standard)
- 9S-106: Error history (1000 cases max)
- 9S-108: Firmware update log (200 cases max)
- 9S-110: Power on/off log (100 cases max)
3. For image-related problems, collect image samples with the problem areas and the feeding direction
marked first. Then provide information about the media type and weight, and the print data / spool
files for duplicating the problem.
4. For abnormal acoustic noise, describe the situation in as much detail as possible.
5. For hardware-related problems, provide photos of any broken parts, paper jams, etc.
In case of paper jams, include the type of paper and its manufacturer.
6. For software-related problems, provide list prints, TopAccess Logs and the detailed procedure
needed to duplicate the problem.
* This is the minimum information required to report a complaint. It would be appreciated if you could
obtain additional information.
* Follow the directions of the service center if they request additional information as each issue is
unique to some degree.
6.2.1 Jam
Message displayed in
Error code Contents Troubleshooting
the TopAccess screen
5110 Toner Not Recognized - Please Toner cartridge detection error P. 6-122
Check Toner.
5BD0 Power failure occurred during restore Power supply is cut off during the P. 6-122
restoration of database sent from
TopAccess
5C10 FAX Unit is not attached. Network FAX is disabled because the P. 6-122
FAX Unit is not attached
5C11 Security error on Address Book. The network FAX job failed because P. 6-122
the specified address is not
registered in the Address Book
5C20 The file has been imported Displayed when data have been P. 6-122
imported from TopAccess
(Not an error message)
5C21 Failed to import the file - Invalid file Data import from TopAccess failed P. 6-122 6
format due to invalid file format
5C22 Failed to import the file - Internal Data import from TopAccess failed P. 6-122
error due to an internal error, the cause of
which is unknown
Printer
0: Single-sided 8: Double-sided
FAX
0: Single-sided 8: Double-sided
e-Filing
0: Single-sided 8: Double-sided
List printing
0: Single-sided -
G Unused
H Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 3: Right 4: Top 5: Bottom 6: Book+Top 7: Book+Bottom 8: Left+Top
9: Left+Bottom A: Right+Top B: Right+Bottom
I Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Positive/negative reverse 5: Unused
J Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
K Unused
L Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission
3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print
6: Scan/E-mail transmission
MMM Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
NNN Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[B])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN309 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the exit sensor.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the registration roller clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-108/158)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the registration roller clutch is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN315 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the registration roller clutch.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
YES 6
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers
(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF, PFP, JSP or OCT check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode / Input check
Registration area Automatic duplexing Registration sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[A]
unit 1st transport sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[A]
Exit area Automatic duplexing Exit sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[B]
unit
ADU ADU ADU entrance sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[D]
ADU exit sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/E]
Feeding area Feed cover 2nd transport sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[A]
(Main unit)
LCF LCF side cover LCF feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[C]
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[B]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[B]
Bridge unit Bridge unit Bridge unit transport sensor-1 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[G]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]
JSP JSP cover JSP feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/G]
OCT OCT cover OCT feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]
(1) Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
(2) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
(3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited.
(4) Replace the HDD.
(5) Replace the SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
[E200] Paper fed from the upper drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E210] Paper fed from the lower drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E300] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E330] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E3C0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the registration sensor
Open the Automatic duplexing unit. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[A]
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5. Replace the registration sensor.
l
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the (high-speed/low-speed) clutches working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-203, 205)
l NO 1. Check if the connectors of the (high-speed/low-speed) transport
l clutches are disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the (high-speed/low-speed) transport clutches.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2. Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
NO
Is the 1st transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[A])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the 1st transport sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l 6
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the 1st transport sensor.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the (high-speed/low-speed) transport clutches working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-203, 205)
l NO 1. Check if the connectors of the (high-speed/low-speed) transport
l clutches are disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the (high-speed/low-speed) transport clutches.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2. Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
[E270] Bypass transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor)
[E280] ADU transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the Automatic duplexing unit. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
YES
Is the bypass feed clutch/ADU clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-204/222)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch/ADU clutch is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN311 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
l open circuited.
5. Replace the bypass feed clutch/ADU clutch.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
[E320] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the 2nd transport sensor
[E350] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the 2nd transport sensor
[E3E0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the 2nd transport sensor
Open the side cover. Is there paper in front of the 2nd transport sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the 2nd transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[A]
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the 2nd transport sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the 2nd transport sensor.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
YES
1. Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2. Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out. 6
[E360] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[A])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
l 7. Replace the PFP board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the PFP feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-226)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
l 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241 and CN247 on the PFP board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the PFP transport clutch.
l 7. Replace the PFP board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
[E510] ADU stack jam (paper not reaching the ADU entrance sensor
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
YES
Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-121/171)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN402 and CN405 on the exit board is
l disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board and exit board is
l
l short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the exit motor.
l 7. Replace the ADU exit sensor.
l 8. Replace the exit board.
9. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the equipment. Replace them if they are
worn out.
[E520] ADU transport jam (paper not reaching the ADU exit sensor
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
YES
Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-119)
6
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN402 and CN404 on the MOT/MOT2 board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
l open circuited.
l 6. Replace the ADU exit sensor.
l 7. Replace the MOT/MOT2 board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: refer
to the following table)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the sensor.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers
© 2009 - 2012 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
6 - 35
(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF, PFP, JSP or OCT check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode/Input check
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[B]
NO
Is the JSP feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[D])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the JSP feed sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN262 on the JSP board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the JSP board and LGC board are
l
l short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the JSP feed sensor. 6
l 7. Replace the JSP board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Replace the JSP board.
2. Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the OCT feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the OCT feed sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN262 on the OCT board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the OCT board and LGC board
l
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the OCT feed sensor.
l 7. Replace the OCT board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Replace the OCT board.
2. Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the registration sensor.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out. 6
YES
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-222)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5. Replace the ADU clutch.
l
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
YES
YES
Check the bypass feed roller and separation pad. Replace them if they are worn out.
6
[E130] Upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 1st transport sensor
Open the Automatic duplexing unit. Is there any paper in front of the 1st transport sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the 1st transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[A])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the 1st transport sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the 1st transport sensor.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the upper drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-201)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN315 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the upper drawer feed clutch.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Replace them if they are worn out.
YES
Is the lower drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-202)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN315 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the lower drawer feed clutch.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they
are worn out.
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[B])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
l 7. Replace the PFP board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455 © 2009 - 2012 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
6 - 42
Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-226)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241 and CN247 on the PFP board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch.
l 7. Replace the PFP board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
6
Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Replace them if they are worn out.
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[B])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
l 7. Replace the PFP board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
NO
Is the LCF feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[C])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN1 or CN7 on the LCF board is
l disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
l
l short circuited or open circuited.
6. Replace the LCF feed sensor. 6
l
7. Replace the LCF board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-209)
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected.
l 2. Check if any of the connectors CN1 and CN6 on the LCF board is
l disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
l 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
l short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the LCF feed clutch.
7. Replace the LCF board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Replace them if they are worn out.
NO
Is the front cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the front cover opening/closing switch is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN310 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
l open circuited.
5. Replace the front cover opening/closing switch.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[2]/[A])
l NO 1. Check if the connector for 24 V power supply is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN301 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
5. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[A])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening/closing switch
l is disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch.
l 7. Replace the PFP board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
NO
Is the ADU opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[F])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU opening/closing switch is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN311 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are 6
l open circuited.
l 4. Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board are short circuited
l
or open circuited.
l
l 5. Replace the ADU opening/closing switch.
l 6. Replace the LGC board.
l
l
YES
1. Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the feed cover opening/closing detection sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the feed cover opening/closing detection
l sensor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN311 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5. Replace the feed cover opening/closing detection sensor.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[B])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch
l is disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN1 or CN7 on the LCF board is
l disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l
4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
l short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch.
l 7. Replace the LCF board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Replace the LCF board.
2. Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the bridge unit opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[E] / 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the bridge unit opening/closing switch is
l disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector CN302 / CN400 on the LGC board is
l disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
l 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
5. Replace the bridge unit opening/closing switch.
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the JSP cover switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[E])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the JSP cover switch is disconnected.
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the JSP board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the JSP board and LGC board are
l
l short circuited or open circuited.
6. Replace the JSP cover switch. 6
l
l 7. Replace the JSP board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Replace the JSP board.
2. Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the OCT cover switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[E])
l NO 1. Check if the connector of the OCT cover switch is disconnected?
l 2. Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the OCT board
l is disconnected.
l 3. Check if the connector CN302 on the OCT board is disconnected.
l 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the OCT board and LGC board
l
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l 6. Replace the OCT cover switch.
l 7. Replace the OCT board.
8. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Replace the OCT board.
2. Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the connector J1006 on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor
(PI1P) open circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?
6
l NO 1. Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely.
2. Replace the punch home position sensor.
YES
Replace the punch controller PC board.
MJ-1024
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (P133) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the entrance
sensor (S1)?
3. Is the gap between the flapper and entrance roller shaft other than 0.60?0.20mm when the gate
solenoid (SOL2) is pulled?.
4. Is the harness between the entrance motor (M1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7)
disconnected or open circuited?
5. Is the harness between the gate solenoid (SOL2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
disconnected or open circuited?
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is the connector CN16 (inlet sensor) on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor open-circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1024
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board are
disconnected from the corresponding sensors(inlet sensor [P133], transport path sensor [P134]
and processing tray sensor [P138]) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
4. Replace the sensors.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board. 6
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the transport
sensor (S2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the sensor.
4. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1024
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board are
disconnected from the corresponding sensor (inlet sensor [P133], transport path sensor [P134]
and processing tray sensor [P138] ) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray
sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the sensors.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Are the joint switch, upper cover sensor and front door sensor working properly?
NO 1. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
2. Replace the switch or sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1024
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Close the upper or front cover of the finisher if any of them is opened.
3. Check if the connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from
the upper cover opening sensor (P131) and the front cover opening sensor (P132) , or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.
5. Check if the connector J719 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the front
cover switch (MS31) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
6. Replace the front cover switch (MS31).
7. Is the connector J601/J602 on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
8. Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MSW61) open
circuited?
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J110 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the Joint
switch (SW1) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the Joint switch.
4. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Close the front cover or the stationary tray cover if they are opened.
2. Replace the handle cover installed inside of the front cover if it is broken.
3. Reinstall the stationary tray opening/closing switch if it is incorrectly installed.
4. Check if the connector CN16 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the front
cover switch (SW1) and the stationary tray opening/closing switch (SW2) or the harnesses are
open circuited. Correct if any.
5. Replace the sensors.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1024
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment or on the
stapling tray. Remove it if there is.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or stapler and remove it if there is.
2. Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
3. Check if the connectors J112, J113 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
stapler) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Check if the connectors on the stapler is disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited.
Correct if any.
5. Replace the stapler. 6
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment or on the
finishing tray. Remove it if there is.
2. Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
3. Check if the actuator of the stapler interference sensor (S11) moves smoothly.
4. Check if the connector CN2 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stapler
or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
5. Check the harnesses in the stapler are disconnected or open circuited. Correct if any.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment or on the
finishing tray. Remove it if there is.
2. Check if there is any disconnection, incorrect installation or breakage on the entrance sensor
(S1). Correct if any.
3. Check if the connector CN7 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
entrance sensor (S1) and the harnesses are disconnected or open circuited. Correct if any.
© 2009 - 2012 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
6 - 59
4. Replace the entrance sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[EA70] Stack delivery jam / Stack exit belt home position error / Stack slider home position error
MJ-1025
Is there any paper remaining on the stapling tray?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Are the paper on the stack tray and the latches of the stack delivery belt contacting each
other?
YES Remove the paper on the stack tray.
NO
Is any of the connectors CN5 (delivery belt home position sensor), CN13 (delivery motor) on
the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and delivery belt home position
sensor open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor open-
circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the delivery belt home position sensor working properly?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the delivery motor working properly?
NO Replace the motor.
YES
Rotate the delivery motor by hand. Is there any mechanical problem with the rotation of the
stack delivery belt?
Are the latches of the stack delivery belt damaged?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Check if the connector CN11 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stack
belt exit home position sensor (S9) and the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
2. Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board (CN10)
disconnected or open circuited?
3. Replace the sensor.
4. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if the connector J111 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stack
edging HP sensor (SR8) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
2. Check if the connector J111 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stack
slide motor (M4) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the stack slider HP sensor.
4. Replace the stack slide motor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is the connector CN16 (folding position sensor) on the finisher controller PC board
disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and folding position sensor open-
circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the folding position sensor working properly?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1024
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher, saddle stitcher or the on the transport path of the
equipment. Remove it if there is.
2. Is either of the connectors J9, J10, J13, J21 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board
disconnected?
3. Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (saddle inlet
sensor [PI22], vertical path paper sensor [PI17], No.1 paper sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor
[PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20] and the delivery sensor [PI11]) open circuited?
4. Is each of the sensors (the saddle inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3
paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the
movement of the actuator.)
5. Replace the sensor.
6. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the connector CN16 (folding position sensor) on the finisher controller PC board
disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and folding position sensor open-
circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the folding position sensor working properly? 6
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1024
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher, saddle stitcher or the on the transport path of the
equipment. Remove it if there is.
2. Is the connector J21 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
3. Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and saddle inlet sensor [PI22]
open circuited?
4. Is the saddle inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
5. Replace the sensor.
6. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
1. Replace the SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
2. Replace the LGC board.
NO
1. Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
2. Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.
3. Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the
equipment side is open circuited.
4. Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher
controller PC board is open circuited.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Are there any damage or scratches on the main motor board?
l NO 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 2. Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC
l board are short circuited or open circuited.
l 3. Replace the main motor.
l
4. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN308-8 output from the LGC board is always level “L”?
2. Check if the voltage supplied to the CPU input terminal IC22-98 is always “L”?
3. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board.
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a fixed time
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a fixed time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the
power and check the following items.
[C270] Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction? Are the carriages staying at a
position other than home position?
l YES 1. Check if the connector of the scan motor is disconnected.
l 2. Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short
l circuited or open circuited.
3. Replace the SLG board.
NO
1. Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short circuited or open
circuited.
2. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3. Replace the SLG board.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the
heater.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged
after a while the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough
before checking.
(1) Check if the process unit is properly installed, and check if the connector pins that are connected
to the equipment are disconnected or have any abnormality such as deformation.
(2) Check if the harness connected to the connector J451 on the EPU board has any abnormality.
(3) Replace the EPU memory board. 6
(4) Replace the LGC board.
(1) If the process unit has been replaced with a new one before the equipment is started, turn the
power OFF and then back ON in the EPU replacement mode ([7] + [START]).
(2) If the process unit has not been replaced, check the following.
(3) Check if the process unit is properly installed, and check if the connector pins that are connected
to the equipment are disconnected or have any abnormality such as deformation.
(4) Check if the harness connected to the connector J451 on the EPU board has any abnormality.
(5) Replace the EPU memory board.
(6) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the process unit is a new one. If it is a new one, check the following:
(2) Check if the process unit is properly installed, and check if the connector pins that are connected
to the equipment are disconnected or have any abnormality such as deformation.
(3) Check if the harness connected to the connector J451 on the EPU board has any abnormality.
(4) Replace the EPU memory board.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in “400”, then press [START].
(3) Change the current status counter value “1” or “2” to “0”, then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C410]).
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.
(2) Check if the grounding leaf spring in the fuser unit is in contact due to deformation.
Fig. 6-1
* The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to “0” respectively.
• The error occurred during warming-up: “4” or “5”
• The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: “7”
• The temperature detected by the center thermistor is 240°C or higher: “9”
• The temperature detected by the side thermistor is 240°C or higher: “9”
(1) Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open
circuited.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the RADF board.
(5) Replace the SLG board.
(1) Check if the installed RADF is an option exclusively set for the model.
(2) Replace the RADF with the one exclusively set for the model.
(1) Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the IPC board.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the jumper pin setting on the SYS board / SYS-IMG board is correct. (Check if a jumper
pin is inserted between Pin 1 and Pin 2 of the CN 103 and the CN115.) Confirmation is not
necessary for the SYS-IMG board.
(2) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board / SYS-IMG board (CN131) and LGC board
(CN312) is disconnected or open circuited.
(3) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
(4) Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board.
(5) Replace the SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
(6) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the jumper pin setting on the SYS board / SYS-IMG board is correct. (Check if a jumper
pin is inserted between Pin 1 and Pin 2 of the CN 103 and the CN115.) 6
(2) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board / SYS-IMG board and SLG board is
disconnected or open circuited.
(3) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
(4) Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.
(5) Replace the SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
(6) Replace the SLG board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and feed motor (M1) correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Try turning the stack feed roller (upper) shaft by hand. Does the stack feed roller (upper)
move up/down normally?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Try replacing the feed motor (M1). Is the problem corrected?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
YES
Rotate the stack delivery roller by hand. Does it rotate smoothly?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Try replacing the delivery motor (M3). Is the problem corrected?
YES END.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
6
YES
Is the tray up/down mechanism working properly?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is 24 VDC supplied from the finisher controller PC board to the shift motor as soon as the
tray is driven?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and shift motor (M6) correct?
YES Replace the shift motor.
NO
Correct the wiring.
[Procedure 2]
Is the tray as far as the shift upper limit sensor?
YES Lower the position of the tray.
NO
Is the shift upper limit sensor (PI15) working properly?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
NO
Correct the wiring.
[Procedure 3]
Does the tray go up?
l NO Is 24 VDC supplied from the finisher controller PCB to the shift motor as
l soon as the tray is driven?
l
l NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
l
l YES
l
Is there any problem with the tray up/down mechanism?
l
l YES Fix the lift mechanism.
l
l NO
l
Replace the shift motor.
YES
Is the shift motor clock sensor (PI7) working properly?
YES Replace the finisher controller PC boar
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Try to rotate the staple jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Try replacing the staple/fold motor (M7). Is the problem corrected?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[Procedure 2]
Is the staple/fold motor clock sensor (PI14) working properly?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Does the staple/fold motor operate at the appropriate timing?
YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is the stapler unit drive mechanism working properly?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Try replacing the staple/fold motor (M7). Is the problem corrected?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the staple/fold motor normal?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Try to rotate the fold jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
6
Try replacing the staple/fold motor (M7). Is the problem corrected?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[Procedure 4]
Is the staple/fold motor clock sensor (PI14) working properly?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Does the staple/fold motor operate at the appropriate timing?
YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is the saddle stitch unit drive mechanism working properly?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Try replacing the staple/fold motor (M7). Is the problem corrected?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1024
Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
1. Replace the stapler.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and slide motor correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO 6
Try replacing the slide motor (M8). Is the problem corrected?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1024
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35)
correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
YES Fix the lift mechanism.
NO
1. Replace the stapler shift motor.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
(CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the stapler unit shift motor (M4).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.
NO
1. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2. Replace the punch controller PC board.
MJ-1024
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?
YES End.
NO
1. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2. Replace the punch controller PC board.
MJ-1031
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and alignment motor (front) (M4)
correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Try replacing the alignment motor (front) (M4). Is the problem corrected?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
* You receive a [CC80] error when the [ED14] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the rear alignment plate is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment motor (M10) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the rear alignment motor (M10).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and aligning plate home position
sensor (rear) correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Try replacing the alignment motor (rear) (M5). Is the problem corrected?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and folding position sensor (PI10)
correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the fold jam releasing dial?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
YES
Is the Swing guide home position sensor (PI3) working properly?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and Paddle motor (M2) correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Try to rotate the paddle motor (M2) clockwise and counterclockwise by hand. Is there
mechanical trapping in the rotation of the paddle or the up/down movement of the swing
guide?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
1. Replace the paddle motor (M2)
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
* You receive a [CDE0] error when the [ED15] error occurs three times in succession or during
the initial operation.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem with the paddle is rotated?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the paddle motor (M8) and the finisher control PC board (CN6)
disconnected or open circuited?
l YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the paddle motor (M8).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the punch controller PC board
correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN14-3 (-) on the finisher controller PC
board 24 V?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES 6
Replace the punch controller PC board.
YES
1. Check if the circuit pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short circuited or
open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board if this error occurs frequently.
(1) Check if each connector between the OCT motor and OCT board (CN261) is disconnected.
(2) Check if each connector between the OCT board (CN261) and LGC board (CN302) is
disconnected.
(3) Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.
(4) Check if any conductor pattern on the OCT board and LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
(5) Replace the OCT motor.
(6) Replace the OCT board.
(7) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if each connector between the offset gate motor and MOT2 board (CN406) is
disconnected.
(2) Check if each connector between the MOT2 board (CN406) and LGC board (CN302) is
disconnected.
(3) Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.
(4) Check if any conductor pattern on the MOT2 board and LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
(5) Replace the offset gate motor.
(6) Replace the MOT2 board.
(7) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if there is any abnormality on the connector between the equipment and the process unit.
(2) Is the harness between the LGC board and the drawer connector for process unit disconnected?
(3) Is the harness inside of the process unit and the harness of the drum thermistor disconnected?
(4) Is the connector CN310 on the LGC board, or the connector of the drum thermistor
disconnected?
(5) Replace the drum thermistor.
(6) Replace the EPU memory board.
(7) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE” is displayed on the LCD, check the destination and
then press the [START] button. If the destination is not correct, key in the correct one and then
press the [START] button.
(3) After the confirmation message is displayed on the LCD, press the [INTERRUPT] button (to
initialize the SRAM).
(4) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
(5) Perform the initialization after the software version upgrade (08-947).
(6) Enter the serial number (08-995). Be sure that the serial number is the same as that on the
identification label attached on the rear cover of the equipment.
(7) Initialize the NIC information (08-693).
(8) Turn the power OFF and then start up with the Adjustment mode (05).
(9) Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner” (05-364).
(10) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SRAM on the
SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) Key in “662” and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
(3) Restart the equipment.
(4) Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the “Point and Print” driver.
Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different,
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.
Perform firmware installation (any of OS, HDD, system firmware, PFC firmware, main firmware engine
ROM and scanner firmware) using USB media.
* When the function of the Data Overwrite option (GP-1070) is deleted from the equipment, the
service call “F200” occurs.
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
(2) If there is no problem found in the check (1) above, check the combination of the firmware
version of the system ROM, engine ROM and scanner ROM. Reinstall the scanner ROM
firmware.
(3) If an error occurs after step (2) above has been performed, replace the SLG board.
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the “Received InternetFax Forward”.
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Reset the “Received Fax Forward”.
[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 500)
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of
client's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-
666).
[2BA1] A paper size not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being selected
Check the paper size.
6
[2D12] Message reception error
[2D13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
6
[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error
Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.
(1) Check if the power cable is connected properly and is inserted securely.
(2) Check if the power voltage is unstable.
(3) Reattempt the restoration of the database (Address Book, templates, F-code (Mailbox) or user
information).
(1) Data import failed because the specified file (Address Book, department or user information) is
incorrect or damaged. Check if the file is incorrect or damaged, and then reattempt the import.
(2) Check that no jobs remain and rebuild the databases (Perform 08-684).
(3) If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD (Key in "2" at 08-690).
Notes:
• If you rebuild the databases with a job remaining, delete it after finishing.
• When "Rebuilding all databases (08-684)" is performed, all the data in the Address Book and
Mailbox are deleted. If you back up the data in advance, they will be recovered by restoring
them after rebuilding the database.
Fig. 6-2
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-3
A B
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-4
Moire
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
density.
Parameter adjustment 2 Check the image processing Check the adjustment value for
value parameters. sharpness.
Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-114). When defects occur, perform the
corresponding troubleshooting
procedure.
Lack of sharpness
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
density.
Parameter adjustment 2 Check the image processing Check the adjustment value for
value parameters. sharpness.
Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-114). When defects occur, perform the
corresponding troubleshooting
procedure.
Approx.110mm
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-5
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx.110mm toward the dark image.)
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Fuser unit 2 Is the pressure of the fuser roller Check the pressure releasing parts and
normal? pressurization mechanism.
3 Is the thermistor in contact with the fuser Contact the thermistor with the fuser
roller? roller.
5 Has the fuser roller reached its PM life? Replace the fuser roller.
6 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the adjustment values of fuser
roller normal? roller temperature?
08-407, 410, 411, 450, 515, 516
(08-5285: Only e-STUDIO355/455)
7 Is the power supplied between the fuser Check if the power supply bracket of the
unit entrance guide and the registration fuser unit is installed properly.
roller on the equipment side?
Paper 8 Has the appropriate paper type been Select a proper mode.
selected?
9 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the setting and correct it.
roller in each paper type normal? (08-412, 413, 437, 438, 451, 452, 453,
518, 520, 521)
(08-5328, 5329, 5330, 5331, 5332: Only
e-STUDIO355/455)
Developer material 11 Using the specified developer material? Use the specified developer material and
toner.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-6
Paper 1 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF Change paper. Avoid storing paper in
damp? damp place.
Drum 3 Is the drum surface wet or dirty? Wipe the drum with a piece of dry
cloth.
* Do not use alcohol or other
organic solvents.
Ozone exhaust 4 Is the exhaust fan operating Check the connection of connector.
properly? Replace the ozone exhaust fan.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-7
Pressure between fuser 3 Are the pressure springs working Check and adjust the pressure
roller and pressure roller properly? springs.
Fuser roller temperature 4 Is the temperature of the fuser roller Check the setting and correct it.
normal? 08-407, 410, 411, 450, 515, 516,
(5285: e-STUDIO355/455)
Developer material/Toner 5 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material
material and toner? and toner.
Paper 6 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF Avoid storing paper in damp place.
damp?
7 Is the paper type corresponding to its Use the proper type of paper or
mode? select the proper mode.
8 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the setting and correct it.
roller in each paper type normal? 08-412, 413, 437, 438, 451, 452,
453, 518, 520, 521
(5328, 5329, 5330, 5331, 5332: e-
STUDIO355/455)
9 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-8
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-9
Exposure lamp and 1 Does the exposure lamp light? Check if the connector contacts with
inverter the exposure lamp terminal.
Replace the defective inverter.
Bedewed scanner and 3 Is the scanner or drum bedewed? Clean the mirrors, lens and drum.
drum Keep the power cord plugged in all
trough the day and night.
(For the model with damp heater)
High-voltage transformer 6 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Main charger) output defective? transformer.
CCD, SLG, SYS/SYS- 8 Are the connectors securely Connect the connectors securely.
IMG, LGC connected? Replace the harness.
boards and harnesses Check if the harnesses connecting
the boards are open circuited.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-10
Doctor blade
Developer sleeve
Gear
Fig. 6-11
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-12
Main charger 1 Is there a foreign matter on the Remove the foreign matter.
charger?
Discharge LED 4 Does the discharge LED light Replace the discharge LED or check
normally? the harness and the circuit.
Developer unit 5 Is the developer sleeve rotating Check the drive system of the
normally? developer unit, or clean the sleeve
Is there any abnormality on the surface.
sleeve surface?
Drive system 6 Are the drum and scanner jittering? Check each drive system.
High-voltage transformer 7 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Main charger / Developer output defective? transformer.
bias / Transfer roller unit)
Transfer roller unit 8 Is there any foreign matter adhering Remove the foreign matter from the
to the transfer roller? Is there any roller surface. Replace the roller if
abnormality in the appearance of the there is any abnormality in its
roller? Has the number of output appearance. Also replace the roller if
pages exceeded the threshold for the the number of output pages has
life of the transfer roller? exceeded the threshold of its life.
Feed system 9 Is the aligning amount proper? Adjust the aligning amount.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-13
Drawers 1 Is the drawer or LCF properly Install the drawer or LCF properly.
LCF installed?
2 Is there too much paper in the drawer Reduce paper to 550 or fewer sheets
or LCF? in the drawer.
Reduce paper to 1000 or fewer
sheets in the feeding side tray and
the standby side tray of LCF,
respectively.
3 Is the corner of the paper folded? Change the direction of the paper
and set it again.
4 Are the side guides of the drawer or Adjust the position of the side guides.
LCF properly installed?
Feed roller 5 Is the surface of the feed roller dirty? Clean the feed roller surface with
alcohol, or replace the roller.
Rollers 6 Are the roller and shaft secured? Check and tighten the E-rings, pins,
clips and setscrews.
Registration roller 7 Is the spring detached from the Attach the spring correctly. Clean the
registration roller? roller if it is dirty.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-14
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-15
Main charger 1 Is the needle electrode dirty or Clean or replace the needle
deformed? electrode.
Fuser unit 2 Are the fuser roller, separation finger Clean them.
for fuser roller and thermistor dirty?
High-voltage transformer 4 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Main charger / Developer output defective? transformer.
bias / Transfer roller unit)
Drum 5 Is there a deep scratch on the drum Replace the drum if the scratch has
surface? reached the aluminum base.
6 Is there thin scratch (drum pitting) on Check and adjust the contact
the drum surface? condition of the cleaning blade and
recovery blade.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-16
Developer unit, 1 Is the toner density in the developer Check and correct the auto-toner
Toner cartridge material appropriate? sensor and toner supply operation.
Check if the amount of the toner is
sufficient in the toner cartridge.
Developer material, Toner, 3 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material,
Drum material, toner and drum? toner and drum.
4 Have the developer material and Replace the developer material and
drum reached their PM life? drum.
5 Is the storage environment of the Use the toner cartridge stored in the
toner cartridge 35°c or less without environment with specification.
dew?
Transfer roller unit 11 Is there any foreign matter such as Clean the transfer roller unit.
fiber in the paper transport area of
the transfer roller unit?
12 Is there any foreign matter on the Remove the foreign matter or replace
transfer roller? Is there any the transfer roller.
abnormality on its appearance?
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-17
Paper 1 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF/ Reinsert the paper with the reverse
PFP curled? side up or change the paper.
2 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF Avoid storing paper in damp place.
damp?
Transfer roller unit 5 Is the transfer roller contacting with Check them and reinstall if required.
the drum? Are the charger pushing-
spring and the transfer roller
pressure spring installed properly?
Registration roller 6 Is there any abnormality related to Clean the roller if it is dirty. Securely
the registration roller or with the roller attach the springs if they are
itself? detached. Replace the clutch if it is
defective. Adjust the rotation speed
of the roller.
High-voltage transformer 7 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Transfer roller unit) output defective? transformer.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-18
Main charger 1 Is the main charger dirty? Clean or replace the needle
electrode and main charger grid.
Transfer roller unit 2 Is the transfer roller contacting with Check them and reinstall if required.
the drum? Are the charger pushing-
spring and the transfer roller
pressure spring installed properly?
Laser optical unit 3 Is there any foreign matter or stain on Remove the foreign matter or stain.
the slit glass?
Discharge LED 4 Are the connectors of discharge LED Reconnect the harness securely.
harness securely connected?
Developer unit 7 Is the magnetic brush in proper Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.
contact with the drum?
Scanner 10 Is the original cover or RADF Close the original cover or RADF.
opened?
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-19
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-20
Scanner/Printer 1 Have the printed images been Adjust the position of the leading
adjustment dislocated in the same manner? edge of paper in the Adjustment
Mode.
Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller dirty, or the Clean the registration roller with
spring detached? alcohol.
Securely attach the springs.
3 Is the registration roller working Adjust or replace the gears if they are
properly? not engaged properly.
Feed clutch 4 Is the feed clutch working properly? Check the circuit or feed clutch, and
replace them if necessary.
Pre-registration guide 5 Is the pre-registration guide installed Install the guide properly.
properly?
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-21
Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller rotating Check the registration roller area and
normally? springs for installation condition.
Fuser roller and pressure 3 Are the fuser roller and pressure Check the fuser roller area.
roller roller rotating normally? Replace the rollers if necessary.
Operation of carriage 5 Is there any problem with the slide Replace the slide sheet.
sheet?
8 Is there any problem with the drive Check the drive system of the
system of the carriage? carriage.
Drum drive system 10 Is there any problem with the drive Check the drive system of the drum.
system of the drum? Clean or replace the gears if they
have stains or scratches.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-22
Developer material 1 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material
material? and toner.
3 Has the cleaning blade been turned Replace the cleaning blade.
up? Check and replace drum if
necessary.
Toner recovery auger 4 Is the toner recovered normally? Clean the toner recovery auger.
Check the pressure of the cleaning
blade.
Check if the toner recovery auger is
rotated properly.
Fuser unit 5 Are there bubble-like scratches on Replace the fuser roller. Check and
the fuser roller (94 mm pitch on the adjust the temperature control circuit.
image), (110mm: e-STUDIO355/
455)?
6 Has the fuser roller reached its PM Replace the fuser roller.
life?
7 Is the pressure of the fuser roller Check and adjust the mechanism.
normal?
8 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the setting and correct it.
roller normal? 08-407, 410, 411, 450, 515, 516
(5285: e-STUDIO355/455)
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-23
Original glass 1 Is the original glass dirty? Clean the original glass.
Main charger 2 Are the needle electrode, main Clean or replace them.
charger grid and main charger case
dirty?
Discharge LED 3 Is the discharge LED dirty? Clean the discharge LED.
Exposure lamp 6 Is the exposure lamp tilted? Adjust the position of the exposure
lamp.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-24
Paper 1 Is the paper type corresponding to its Check the paper type and mode.
mode?
Transfer roller unit 3 Is the power supplying spring of the Check the power supplying spring
transfer roller installed securely? (Is it and reinstall it.
almost detached?)
High-voltage transformer 4 Is the output from the high-voltage Adjust the output. Replace the
(Transfer roller unit) transformer normal? transformer if necessary.
Separation 5 Is the output from the separation Adjust the output, from the
charger too high? separation charger.
Feeding direction
Fig. 6-25
1. Check that the screw fixing the fuser unit is not loose.
2. Remove CN309 and check if the circuit between 1 pin and 7 pin is electrically conducted.
3. Replace the LGC board.
• If more than one LGC board, IMG board or SYS (or SYS-IMG) board requires replacement, do so by
the following procedure.
1. First, replace one of the board to be replaced.
2. Turn the power ON and confirm that “READY” is displayed.
3. Turn the power OFF.
4. Replace another board that requires replacement.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4.
• To replace the SYS board / SYS-IMG board, see the following procedure.
P.7-9 "7.1.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board / SYS-IMG board"
1. Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
2. Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100-108 or 120 occurred).
Result
Description Diagnosis
ID VALUE
05 0 Low possibility of physical failure HDD replacement
c5 0 is not required.
05 From 1 to 999 Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD is recovered. HDD replacement
c5 0 is not required.
05 Any value High possibility of defective sector existence. (There will be a HDD replacement
c5 1 or more possibility of physical failure depending on the use of HDD.) is recommended.
05 Either one is at High possibility of physical failure HDD replacement
c5 least 1000. is recommended.
05 All values are High possibility of physical failure (A HDD connector, harness or HDD replacement
c5 displayed as SYS board / SYS-IMG board may be one of the causes.) is recommended.
“-------”.
3. ID=05 and c5
ID Name Description Remarks
05 Re-allocated Sector Count The number of sectors reassigned This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count The number of candidate sectors to This value tends to increase at
be reassigned HDD failure.
01 Read Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
03 Spin Up Time This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to
spin up from a spun down condition.
04 Spin Start/Stop Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups
from a spun down condition.
05 Re-allocated Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated
sectors.
09 Power-On Hours This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes
depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.
0a Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.
7
0c Power Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive
has been turned on.
c0 Power off Retract Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency
unloads.
c1 Load Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/
unloads.
c3 ECC On the Fly Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On
the Fly.
c4 Reallocation Event Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the
reallocation events.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate
sectors to be reallocated.
c6 Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
uncorrectable sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate) This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found
in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8 Write Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.
Note:
"Over-range" appears when the digits of the numbers obtained from HDD exceed the acceptable
limit for being displayed on the touch panel. This is not shown as a failure.
Start
Setting completed
Fig. 7-1
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.
(3) Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The “FUNCTION LIST FOR
MAINTENANCE” is printed out.
(2) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Note:
Explain the procedure to the user (machine administrator) and ask him/her to enter his/her
password.
(3) Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
(4) Press the [FUNCTION] button. The “FUNCTION” list is printed out.
(2) Replace the HDD. For the details, see the following page.
Service Manual Chap.2
(9) When the Fax Unit (GD-1250) is installed, perform “Fax Set Up” (1*-100) and “Clearing the
image data” (1*-102).Then turn the power OFF.
Country Name
State or Province Name
Locality Name
Organization Name
Organizational Unit Name
Common Name
Email Address 7
* When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel.
(only when security with a certificate is used)
Also, upload the following certificate file with “Install Certificate for Wireless LAN” of TopAccess.
CA certificate
User certificate
(1) Print out the "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE" after the HDD formatting.
P.7-5 "[B] Print out “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE”"
(2) While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the main power switch ON. (Function Mode)
(3) Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
(3) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Note:
Explain the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter his/
her password.
(4) Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
Start
Setting completed
Fig. 7-2
Important:
Before replacing the SYS board with the one provided as a service part, be sure to set the
jumper line on the board as shown below.
This setting is not needed for the SYS-IMG board.
1. CN103
1 2 3
1 2 3
(3) Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board / SYS-IMG board (from the old SYS board /
SYS-IMG board).
(4) Install SRAM board to the new SYS board / SYS-IMG board (from the old SYS board / SYS-IMG
board).
When GP-1070 (Data Overwrite Enabler) has been installed, "F200" service call occurs. In this case,
perform cancelling the "F200" service call (installing any of the OS / HDD SYS / PFC Firmware / Engine
MainFirmware / Scanner Firmware using the USB media), and then install GP-1070 (Data Overwrite
Enabler) again.
e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455 © 2009 - 2012 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
REPLACEMANT OF HDD/PC BOARDS
7 - 10
7.1.5 Procedures when replacing the LGC board
Note:
Before replacing the LGC board, perform the following procedure.
P.7-1 "7.1.1 Precautions when replacing PC boards"
Depending on the status of equipment, the code setting values of step (1) could not be obtained.
In this case, start from step (2). In another method, if there are previously output data, you can
input them. In case that the SRAM data are damaged, obtain the code setting values in advance
such as when equipment is installed.
(1) Start up the equipment with the setting mode (08) and make a note of the setting values in the
following codes, or start up the list print mode (9S) and store them in the USB or print them.
08-1150-7
08-1200-6
08-1200-7
08-1246-6
08-1246-7
08-4622
08-6977-0
08-6977-1
08-6977-2 7
08-6977-3
08-6977-4
(2) Turn the main power switch OFF and take off the LGC board.
Service Manual Chap.2
(3) Attach a battery to the new LGC board. Do not install EEPROM.
(4) Install the new LGC board in the equipment. For the details, refer to Chapter 2 in the Service
Manual.
(5) Start up the equipment with the setting mode (08) and initialize SRAM (08-9090).
Note:
For 5 seconds after the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, do not turn the main power switch OFF.
Do not enter or set another code after the initialization.
(7) Install the removed LGC board's EEPROM into the new LGC board's IC 29.
(8) Start up the equipment with the setting mode (08) and copy the data in the EEPROM to the
SRAM (08-4582).
(9) Enter the setting values which were noted or output in (1).
(12) Start up the equipment with the setting mode (08) and check the engine ROM version (08-903).
(1) Start up the equipment with the setting mode (08) and make a note of the setting values in the
following codes, or start up the list print mode (9S) and store them in the USB or print them.
08-1150-7
08-1200-6
08-1200-7
08-1246-6
08-1246-7
08-4622
08-6977-0
08-6977-1
08-6977-2
08-6977-3
08-6977-4
(2) Turn the main power switch OFF and take off the battery and EEPROM from the LGC board.
(3) Attach a battery to the new LGC board. Do not install EEPROM.
(4) Start up the equipment with the setting mode (08) and initialize SRAM (08-9090).
Note:
For 5 seconds after the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, do not turn the main power switch OFF.
Do not enter or set another code after the initialization.
(5) Turn the main power switch OFF and install the removed EEPROM.
(6) Start up the equipment with the setting mode (08) and copy the data in the EEPROM to the
SRAM (08-4582).
(7) Enter the setting values which were noted or output in (1).
When the SLG board has been replaced, make sure to follow the procedure below.
(2) Replace the SLG board. For the retails, see the following page.
Service Manual Chap.2
(6) Turn the main power switch ON and start up with the Setting Mode (08).
Start
Setting completed
Fig. 7-3
(3) Replace the SRAM board. For the details, see the following page.
Service Manual Chap.2
(1) Turn the main power switch ON while pressing [3] and [CLEAR] simultaneously.
(2) When “Firmware Assist Mode” appears on the LCD, check that “4: SRAM Data Format.” is
marked and then press the [START] button. If not marked, key in [4] and then press the [START]
button.
(3) When “SRAM Data Format Complete.” is displayed on the LCD, the formatting is completed.
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [3] and the [CLEAR] button simultaneously.
(2) After “Firmware Assist Mode” is displayed on the LCD, check that “1: Clear SRAM update Error
flags.” is marked and press the [START] button.
If not, key in [1] and then press the [START] button.
(3) When “SRAM update Error flags cleared.” is displayed on the LCD, clearing the flag is 7
completed.
(8) Set the dial type according to these buttons: [USER FUNCTIONS] -> [ADMIN] -> [FAX] ->
[INITIAL SETUP]
Start
Settings completed
Fig. 7-4
(1) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while pressing the digital key [9] and the
[START] button simultaneously.
(2) Key in “1” three times, and then press the [START] button.
[ 1 ] Re-registration method
The Electronic License Key registered using the one-time dongle can be re-registered only in the same
equipment.
When the SYS board / SYS-IMG board or the SRAM board is replaced, follow the procedures of the re-
registration below.
1. After the SYS board / SYS-IMG board or SRAM board is replaced, set up the equipment referring to
the following procedures.
P.7-9 "7.1.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board / SYS-IMG board"
P.7-14 "7.1.8 Precautions and Procedures when replacing SRAM board"
2. Perform 08-3840 with the one-time dongle previously used for registering the Electronic key.
3. When the authentication succeeds, the re-registration screen appears and the available re-
registration numbers are displayed after the option names.
4. Perform the registration in the same manner as a regular one.
Note:
This procedure is available only for the one-time dongle used for the first registration so that the
information of the model is re-registered using the same one. 7
When the Electronic License Key is registered, identify the combination of the one-time dongle
and the equipment registered using it.
Note:
The Electronic key of the IPSec option (GP-1080) cannot be re-registered.
4. Perform 08-3841. The Electronic keys which can be returned to the one-time dongle are displayed.
5. Select one and press the [RETURN] button.
Note:
The Electronic key is deleted from the equipment and is stored in the one-time dongle.
6. After the equipment is replaced, start up with the Setting mode (08).
7. Connect the one-time dongle to the USB port and perform 08-3840.
8. Perform the re-registration in the same manner as a regular one.
If disposing of the HDD when the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) has been installed, perform the
following settings for security.
P.2-63 "2.7 Setting Mode (08)"
Equipment
Firmware Updating method
Master data USB media
(HDD program data, System firmware, UI data)
System ROM USB media
(OS data) Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2)
Engine ROM USB media
(Main firmware) Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2)
Scanner ROM USB media
(Scanner firmware) Download jig
(K-PWA-DLM-320)
Options
Model name Firmware Updating method
Reversing Automatic Document RADF firmware
Feeder (RADF)
8
(MR-3021/3022)
Hole Punch Unit Hole punch unit firmware
(MJ-6101)
Saddle Stitch Finisher Finisher firmware
(MJ-1025)
Saddle Stitch Finisher Finisher firmware Download jig
(MJ-1024) Saddle stitcher firmware (K-PWA-DLM-320)
Hanging Finisher Finisher firmware
(MJ-1031)
Finisher Finisher firmware
(MJ-1101)
Converter firmware*
Fax Unit FAX firmware
(GD-1250)
* The harness jig for board connection (HRNS-CNV-DL-JIG) is necessary.
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
USB media
C. Scanner ROM
K-PWA-DLM-320
ROM6 ROM3
Store the update program loader (mentusb2.o) in the root directory, and store the model specific update
program (dlFirmWare_205_455) and the data file for updating in the model specific folder.
205_455 205_455N
mentusb2.o mentusb2.o
205_455 205_455N
dlFirmWare_205_455 dlFirmWare_205_455
firmImage0.bin firmImage0.bin
hdd.bin hdd.bin
T470MWW.xxx T470MWW.xxx
T471SLGWW.xxx T471SLGWW.xxN
Fig. 8-1
Important:
• Only the USB media which meet the following conditions should be used for updating. Be
careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB media with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port)
and its capacity is between 256 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- Operation of the USB media used for updating has been confirmed at the input check of
this equipment (Test mode 03).
( P.2-4 "2.2 Input Check (Test Mode 03)")
- USB media which comply with the following standards regulated by USB-IF (USB
Implementers Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Most common USB media comply with the specification above and can be used for
updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color Systems and
Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the most of these
devices are developed based on use in a PC environment (Windows or Macintosh).
Therefore, check thoroughly that the device is operational in the equipment for which
the updating will be performed when purchasing it.
• The USB media complying with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating.
• Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk), since it is never
guaranteed.
• It is possible to store the model specific update program and the data file for updating directly
in the root directory when you store the updating data file for one specific model in the USB
media. However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored
in the root directory already exists, this will have priority.
(1) Connect the USB media to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data file is
stored.
Store the update program loader (mentusb2.o) in the root directory, and store the model specific
update program (dlFirmWare_205_455) and the data file for updating in the model specific folder.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
(3) Connect the USB media to the USB port on the right upper cover. 8
USB port
USB media
Fig. 8-2
Note:
Updating cannot be performed with multiple USB media connected at the same time.
(4) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [4] and
[9] buttons.
Data in the USB media are checked and the checking status is displayed on the screen.
The screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx. 1 minutes.
On this screen, the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to
be updated are displayed.
Notes:
• The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
media. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB media in the
following conditions.
Item Condition
1. OS Update firmImage0.bin is written.
2. HDD SYS Update hdd.bin is written.
3. Engine Main Firmware Update T470MWW.xxx is written.
* xxx is version.
4. Scanner Firmware Update T471SLGWW.xxx is written.
* xxx is version.
• For "2. HDD SYS Update", "3. Engine Main Firmware Update" and "4. Scanner Firmware
Update", an asterisk (*) indicating that the item to be installed is not displayed next to one
already installed in the same version as that of the update data for the purpose of efficiency,
and this will not happen in the standard setting. If you want to install it, select it manually
before starting the update.
• If the USB media are not recognized properly, “Set Correct USB Storage Device” message is
displayed. In this case, disconnect the USB media and connect again within 3 minutes, or
shut down the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from
(4).
• If any of the error messages below is displayed, confirm if the update program or the data file
in the USB media is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (4).
Error
Error message Cause
number
- There is no mentusb2.o Update program loader (mentusb2.o)
is not stored.
01 There is no dlFirmWare_205_455 in the storage Model specific update program
device. (dlFirmWare_205_455 ) is not stored.
01 There is no dlFirmWare_xxx_xxx in the storage The jumper line on the SYS board is
device. set for another model.
* The model name comes at “xxx_xxx”.
02 Error Loadmodule Module loading failed.
03 Machine Model Get Error Model information was not
downloaded.
04 Please Change USB Storage or Please Check Checking of data file failed.
ROMDATA
05 Other models ROMDATA Vxxxx.xxx x Master data of other model (hdd.bin)
* The version name comes at “xxxx.xxx.x”. are stored.
Item Remarks
1. OS Update Updating OS data
2. HDD SYS Update Updating Master data and System data
3. Engine Main Firmware Update Updating Engine ROM
4. Scanner Firmware Update Updating Scanner ROM
(7) “Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is
completed properly.
Fig. 8-4
8
(8) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment, and then remove
the USB media.
Note:
When the equipment has been shut down normally, the LCD screen and LEDs (green and red)
go OFF.
When OS data have been updated and the equipment has been shut down immediately after the
update, the LEDs (green and red) may not go OFF even if the LCD screen goes OFF. This
indicates that the equipment is not shut down normally. Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control
panel for more than 5 seconds, and then turn the main switch OFF. Then remove the USB media.
Update Completed
Fig. 8-5
Fig. 8-6
Fig. 8-7
Fig. 8-8
Fig. 8-9
Equipment
Firmware Stored
System ROM SYS board / SYS-IMG board
(OS data)
Engine ROM Logic PC board
(Main firmware) (LGC board)
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)
Connector Connector
(for SYS board (for ROM writer
/ SYS-IMG board adapter connection)
connection)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the
board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to
these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 8-11
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model 8
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881] [PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
Fig. 8-12 Fig. 8-13
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
8
Engine ROM
Rotary Switch File Name Flash ROM
1 T470MWW.xxx ROM1
2 N/A ROM2
3 N/A ROM3
4 N/A ROM4
5 N/A ROM5
6 N/A ROM6
(1) Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2).
(2) Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment.
Fig. 8-14
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
Fig. 8-15
(5) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [8] and
[9] buttons.
Note:
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not
completed properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. In this case,
shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart
updating from the beginning.
- Is the download jig connected properly?
- Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
- Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(9) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Remove the download jig and install the cover plate.
Note:
When the equipment has been shut down normally, the LCD screen and LEDs (green and red)
go OFF.
When OS data have been updated and the equipment has been shut down immediately after the
update, the LEDs (green and red) may not go OFF even if the LCD screen does. This indicates
that the equipment has not shut down normally. Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel
for more than 5 seconds, and then turn the main switch OFF. Then remove the download jig.
8
(1) Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2).
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Fig. 8-16
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN319) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Fig. 8-17
(7) When the update is completed properly, the LED (END) on the download jig blinks.
The LED starts blinking approx. 15 sec. after the update starts. It is assumed that the update has
failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, shut down the
equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the
beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
(10) Install the cover plate and then close the front cover.
Equipment
Firmware Stored
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC
(Scanner firmware) board
(SLG board)
Options
Model name Firmware Stored
Reversing Automatic Document RADF firmware RADF control PC board
Feeder (RADF)
(MR-3021/3022)
Hole Punch Unit Hole punch unit firmware Hole punch control PC board
(MJ-6101)
Finisher Finisher firmware Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1025)
Saddle Stitch Finisher Finisher firmware Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1024) Saddle stitcher firmware
Finisher Finisher firmware Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1101) Converter firmware Converter PC board
Hanging Finisher Finisher firmware Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1031)
Fax Unit Fax unit firmware FAX board
(GD-1250)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Connector Mark for ROM LED
installation direction
ROM
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
Note:
Since the update data for the MR-3021 and the MR-3022 differ, be sure to install the correct
ROM according to the model.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Right upper
cover 8
Fig. 8-19
Cover plate
Fig. 8-20
Connector
Fig. 8-21
(6) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks.
The LED starts blinking approx. 20 sec. after the update starts. It is assumed that the update has
failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, shut down the
equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the
beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Remove the download jig, and then install the cover plate and right upper cover.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Fig. 8-22
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the RADF control PC board.
Fig. 8-23
(6) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(8) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
(1) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
(2) Remove the finisher board access cover and change the setting of the DIP-SW1 (SW1) on the
finisher control PC board as shown in the figure below.
ON
SW1
1 2 3 4
Fig. 8-24
(3) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons. The [LED1] on the finisher control panel starts blinking. Count the number of times it
blinks. If the number of blinks is “6”, this indicates that the value for the stopping position is the
default. If the number is other than “6”, record it because the value needs to be reset after the
firmware is updated.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the finisher board access cover.
Fig. 8-25
(4) Release the latches and take off the rear lower cover of the hole punch unit.
Fig. 8-26
Rear cover
Fig. 8-27
(6) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the finisher control PC board.
Download jig
Fig. 8-28
(7) Set the DIP-SW4 on the hole punch control PC board to ON.
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 8-29
(8) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights.
(10) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel and turn the power OFF using the main power
switch and remove the download jig.
(11) Set the DIP-SW4 on the hole punch control PC board to OFF.
Note:
When the number of blinks is other than “6” (which indicates that the adjustment value is “0”) at
the section “[A]Checking the hole punch position”, follow the steps of “5.1 Stopping Position
Adjustment” in the MJ-6101 Service Manual to adjust the value to the one that has been set
before the update.
(12) Change the settings of the DIP-SW1 and -SW2 on the hole punch control PC board according to
the model as shown in the figure below.
MJ-6101E MJ-6101N
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
MJ-6101F MJ-6101S
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 8-30
(14) Install the rear lower cover of the hole punch unit.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Fig. 8-31
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 8-32
Fig. 8-33
(6) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while [0] button and [8] button are pressed
simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed, or LED flashes fast. In this case, turn OFF the
power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the
beginning.
(8) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel and turn the power OFF using the main power
switch and remove the download jig. Return the DIP switch to the status before updating.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Fig. 8-34
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 8-35
Fig. 8-36
(6) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while [0] button and [8] button are pressed
simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
Important:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig. 8-37
(8) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel and turn the power OFF using the main power
switch and remove the download jig. Return the DIP switch to the status before updating.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
Fig. 8-38
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the Finisher control board.
Download jig
Fig. 8-39
(5) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights
(7) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel and turn the power OFF using the main power
switch and remove the download jig. Install the board access cover.
Important:
• Be sure to connect the equipment and finisher (MJ-1101) before updating the converter
firmware.
• Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
• Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
operated properly.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Fig. 8-40
Fig. 8-41
(5) Take off the converter PC board from the logic PC board (LGC board).
Fig. 8-42
(6) Connect the 10-pin side of the harness jig for board connection to the connector (CN2) of the
converter PC board.
CN2
Fig. 8-43
CN15
Fig. 8-44
Notes:
• Be sure to release the connection cable from the connector (CN15) of the finisher control PC
board when the hole punch unit (MJ-6101) has been installed.
• Be careful not to short-circuit any part of the converter PC board.
(8) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the Finisher control board.
Download jig
Fig. 8-45
(9) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights.
(10) When the update completes normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking approx. 20 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update has failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 30 seconds
have elapsed. In this case, shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear
the problems and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the downloading jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
• Have the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
• Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
• Is the harness jig for board connection connected to connector (CN2) of the converter PC
board and the connector (CN15) of the finisher control PC board correctly?
(12) Remove the download jig and the harness jig for board connection from the finisher control PC
board.
Note:
Be sure to secure the connection cable in the connector (CN15) of the finisher control PC board
when the hole punch unit (MJ-6101) has been installed.
(14) Remove the harness jig for board connection from the converter PC board.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
(3) Take off the hanging finisher (MJ-1031) from the equipment.
Fig. 8-46
Fig. 8-47
Fig. 8-48
(6) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the Finisher control board.
Fig. 8-49
(7) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights.
(8) When the update completes normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking approx. 12 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update has failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 20 seconds
have elapsed. In this case, shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear
the problems and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the downloading jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
• Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
• Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
(9) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel and turn the power OFF using the main power
switch and remove the download jig.
(2) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment and turn the power
OFF using the main power switch.
Fig. 8-50
Cover plate
Fig. 8-51
(6) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Fig. 8-52
(7) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(8) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks.
The LED starts blinking approx. 30 sec. after the update starts. It is assumed that the update has
failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, shut down the
equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the
beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(9) Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel and turn the power OFF using the main power
switch and remove the download jig. Install the cover plate.
(1) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while pressing the digital key [9] and the
[START] button simultaneously.
* When the equipment is already in the other setting mode, press the [ON/OFF] button on the
control panel instead of using the main switch.
(2) Key in “1” three times, and then press the [START] button.
(4) Keep pressing the [ON/OFF] button until you hear a sound to shut down the equipment.
8.5.1 Procedure
(1) Update “System ROM“ of the system control PC board (SYS board / SYS-IMG board) using the
download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2).
Updating with the USB media becomes possible only after the “System ROM” (OS data) has
been updated.
See the updating procedure below for details.
P.8-16 "8.2 Firmware Updating with PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2"
(2) Update “Master Data”, “Engine ROM” and “Scanner ROM” using the USB media.
See the updating procedure below for details.
P.8-5 "8.1 Firmware Updating with USB Media"
(3) When the update with the USB media for “Engine ROM” and “Scanner ROM” failed, update
these ROMs using the respective download jigs in the table below.
Firmware Storage location Download jig
Engine ROM Logic PC board PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(LGC board) P.8-22 "8.2.3 Engine 8
ROM"
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC board K-PWA-DLM-320
(SLG board) P.8-25 "8.3.1 Scanner
ROM"
Important:
If the equipment cannot be started even when the above update has been performed, check that
there is no damage to the “SYS board / SYS-IMG board”, “LGC board” or “SLG board”. Replace
them if necessary.
[A] When the update of the System ROM (OS data) failed
NO
Failed twice or more? Update USB.
YES
NO
Update succeeded?
YES
Update completed
NO
Failed twice or more? Update USB.
YES
Update USB.
NO
Update succeeded?
8
YES
Replace HDD.
Update USB.
Check HDD/ROM version.
NO
NO
Is HDD/ROM version correct?
Replace SYS board / SYS-IMG board.
YES
Update USB.
Update completed
NO
Failed twice or more? Update USB.
YES
NO
Update succeeded?
YES
Update completed
9.1 Construction
The power supply unit consists of the AC filter, insulation type DC output circuit, heater lamp control
circuit and damp heater power supply circuit.
1. AC filter
Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the equipment from leaking
to the outside.
2. DC output circuits
Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part. The DC
voltage is divided into the following two lines.
a. Main switch line :Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process.
Two kinds of voltage (+5V, +12V) are output when the main switch of the
equipment is turned ON.
b. Door switch line :Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process, being
supplied via the interlock switch. Two kinds of voltage (+5VD and +24VD) are
output only when the main switch of the equipment is turned ON and two doors
(front cover and ADU unit) are closed.
3. Output protection
Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits (a fuse and internal
protection circuit). This is to prevent the defectives (damage or abnormal operation of the secondary
circuit) which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an overvoltage due to a
short circuit between different voltages. If the protection circuit is activated (except the case the fuse
is blown out), remove the causes such as short-circuit. Turn ON the power again to clear the
overcurrent protection.
- When the Super sleep mode is set to be disabled on the control panel, TopAccess and with the
code 08-8543
- When the Wireless LAN Module, Bluetooth Module, e-BRIDGE ID Gate or Data Overwrite
Enabler is installed, or when the IPsec Enabler is installed and its function is set to be enabled
- When the setting for receiving confidential data on each line (08-3846) is set to ON
- When operation is being performed in the self-diagnosis mode (Disabled until the main switch is
turned OFF)
- Sleep mode
Since +5VB, +5VD, +12VB and +24V DC voltages are not supplied but +12VA, +5VA and +5VS
DC voltages only, the equipment does not enter into the ready state.
1. +5V
+5VS : CN418 Pins 11 and 12
Output to the SYS board / SYS-IMG board
+5VA : CN418 Pins 8 and 9
Output to the SYS board / SYS-IMG board
+5VB : CN418 Pins 1
Output to the SYS board / SYS-IMG board
+5VB : CN415 Pin 4
Output to the FUS board
+5VB : CN415 Pins 1, 2 and 3
Output to the LGC board, PFP/ LCF (via LGC board),
Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
+5VB : CN415 Pin 5
Output to the finisher
+5VB : CN419 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the SLG board
+5VB : CN419 Pin 4
Output to the RADF
2. +12V
+12VA : CN418 Pin 5
Output to the SYS board / SYS-IMG board
+12VB : CN419 Pin 5
Output to the SLG board
The followings are two output channels which are linked with the door switch.
1. +5V
+5VD : CN415 Pin 14
Output to the LGC board
2. +24V
+24VD1 : CN415 Pins 19, 21, 22 and 24
Output to the LGC board, High-voltage transformer (via LGC board),
PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
+24VD1 : CN419 Pins 11 and 12
Output to the SLG board
+24VD2 : CN417 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the MOT/MOT2 board
+24VD2 : CN417 Pins 3 and 4
Output to the main motor
+24VD3 : CN419 Pins 15 and 16
Output to the RADF
+24VD4 : CN415 Pin 23
Output to the finisher
CN418 For the SYS board / SYS-IMG board +5VS, +5VA, +5VB, +12VA
CN415 For the LGC board, FUS board, PFP/LCF (via LGC +5VB
board), Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via
LGC board), finisher
CN415 For the LGC board, High-voltage transformer (via +5VD, +24VD1, +24VD4
LGC board), PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit /
Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board), finisher
Damp
heaters
Main switch
FUS board
CN414 CN411
CN410
Neutral filter +5VB CN415 LGC board, FUS board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board),
Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC
9-7
thermostat thermostat +5VB CN418 SYS board / SYS-IMG board
Fig. 9-1
+12VA CN418 SYS board / SYS-IMG board
Center heater lamp
Center heater lamp control circuit +12VB CN419 SLG board
(TRC1)
Configuration of Power Supply Unit
F204
+24VD4 CN415 Finisher
Sub heater lamp HTR1ON CN416 LGC board
Sub heater lamp control circuit HTR2ON CN416 LGC board
(TRC3) HTRASTON CN416 LGC board (For e-STUDIO355/455 only)
(For e-STUDIO355/455 only)
CN413
Cover opening/closing
interlock switch
e-STUDIO205L/255/305/355/455
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
9
9.6 Sequence of Power Supply
ON ON ON
PWR-DN
4.85V or more
4.85V or more
5.0VS(MAIN)
4.85V or more
SYS-EN
4.85V or more
4.85V or more
5.0VA(MAIN)
11.4 V or more
11.4 V or more
12VA(MAIN)
PWR-EN
4.85V or more
4.85V or more
5.0VB(MAIN)
11.4 V or more
RLY-ON
4.85V or more
22.8V or more
5.0VD(DOOR)
24VD(DOOR) 4.85V or more
22.8V or more
Fig. 9-2
FG
HRNS-MAIN-SW-471
CN411
AC-SW-IN(L)
1 3
AC-SW-OUT(L)
2 4
Main switch 3
AC-SW-IN(N)
1
AC-SW-OUT(N)
4 2
HRNS-INTERLOCK-471
CN413
Front cover A
SW-OUT
1 CN412: Fuser unit
interlock switch B e-STUDIO355/455
Fuser front Fuser center
Switching regulator CN430:
e-STUDIO205L/255/305 J616 thermostat thermostat
(LVPS) 1
HTR_L
1
ADU interlock B
SW-IN
switch A 3 Center heater lamp
HTR1_N
2 2
CN414
SW-IN
A 3 Side heater lamp
Damp heater B
SW-OUT
1 HTR2_N
switch A HRNS-FUS2-471-J 3 3
B
Sub heater lamp
HRNS-FUS-471-J HTR3_N
4 4
(For other models)
HRNS-ACIN1-471(473)
VH-3pin:e-STUDIO205L/255/305
(For only e-STUDIO355/455)
VH-4pin:e-STUDIO355/455 HRNS-ACIN2-471(473)
J560 CN414
HRNS-FUS-471
1 1 3
3 3 1
(Mini Uni-3pin) HRNS-FUS2-471
CN431 4 3 2 1 Scanner
LVPS J45 J46
2 2 2 Scanner damp
1 1 1 heater (Right)
Fuse PC board
CN432 Drum
AC(N:SCN-DH)
1
AC(L:SCN-DH)
D-HTR-SCN 3 J562 J568
AC(N:DRM-DH) HRNS-D/H-DRM-471
D-HTR-DRM 4 1 1 1
6
AC(L:DRM-DH)
2 2 2 Drum damp heater
HRNS-D/H-471 B A
(Faston-#250) (Faston-#250)
Drum damp
heater thermostat
CN433
1
D-HTR-CST
2
Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other models
Fig. 9-3
2. Service Notification
Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX.
To start in the self-diagnosis mode, turn OFF the power using the main power switch, then turn ON the
power while two digital keys designated to each mode.
10.1.1 Outline
Automatically orders the toner.
1. Placing an Order
There are two ways to place an order.
- FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
2. Order Intervals 10
When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the
specified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically.
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from the
ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.
- Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)
NAME
TEL NUMBER
ADDRESS
NAME
ADDRESS
NUMBER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
*1 The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the
CONDITION.
*1 When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is not
sent.
(1) Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to “0”.
(3) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
(5) Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.
* Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig. 10-1
Fig. 10-2
10
Fig. 10-3
Fig. 10-4
Fig. 10-5
10
Fig. 10-6
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of SUPPLIER to set the required item.
[NAME] --- Input the name of supplier.
[ADDRESS] --- Input the address of supplier.
Fig. 10-7
Fig. 10-8
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER] Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[NAME] Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER] Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
(20) Press the [OK] button to register and complete the order information setting.
10
Fig. 10-9
Fig. 10-10
Fig. 10-11
Fig. 10-12
(27) Press the [OK] button to register the setting of toner order.
(29) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and
returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished.
(1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)
Fig. 10-13
*1. Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
Fig. 10-14
*1. Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
*2. "FullColor:0" and "TwinColor:0" do not change. The value for "Black:" is the counter value.
*3. "TwinColor:0" does not change. The values for "FullColor:" and "Black:" are the counter
values.
Fig. 10-15
*1. Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
10.2.1 Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
• PM Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
10
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] tab. Then enter the password and
press the [OK] button.
• Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig. 10-16
Fig. 10-17
10
Fig. 10-18
Fig. 10-19
Fig. 10-20
10
Fig. 10-21
Fig. 10-22
You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the [SEND
NOW] button.
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in "Notify Date 1" or "Notify Date 2" and press the [OK]
button.
Fig. 10-24
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Fig. 10-25
Fig. 10-26
1. Date
2. Machine model name
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
10
5. Supplier information
6. Customer information
7. Service technician information
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12. Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
13. Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
14. Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
15. Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
16. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (Full color)
17. Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
18. Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
20. Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
21. Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
22. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
23. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
24. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Developer material (K)]
25. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
26. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Other parts]
27. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Other parts]
28. History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
Sheet 1
Fig. 10-27
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
22 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 28
23 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 29
24 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 30
25 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 31
26 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 32
27 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 33
DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER
08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:28 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
(*2)
08/04/12 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 10
08/03/15 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/02/25 11:12 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
Fig. 10-28
1. Date
2. Machine model name
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
5. Customer information
6. Service technician information
7. Supplier information
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12. Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
13. Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
14. Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
15. Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
Fig. 10-29
34 Point Of Destination 0
35 Used History
36 Developer Counter 00000000
37 Developer Driving Time 00000000
38 Drum Driving Time 00000000
Fig. 10-30
1. Date
2. Machine model name
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
5. Supplier information
6. Customer information
7. Service technician information
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12. Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
13. Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
14. Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
15. Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
16. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (Full color)
17. Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
18. Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
20. Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
21. Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
22. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
23. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
10
Sheet 1
Fig. 10-31
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
22 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 28
23 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 29
24 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 30
25 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 31
26 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 32
27 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 33
DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER
08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:28 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
(*2)
08/04/12 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 10
08/03/15 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/02/25 11:12 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
Fig. 10-32
DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER
08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:28 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 (*2)
08/03/15 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/02/25 11:12 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
40 Point Of Destination 0
41 Used History
42 Developer Counter 00000000
43 Developer Driving Time 00000000
44 Drum Driving Time 00000000
Fig. 10-33
1. Date
2. Machine model name
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
5. Customer information
6. Service technician information
7. Supplier information
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12. Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
13. Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
14. Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
15. Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
16. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (Full color)
17. Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
18. Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
20. Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
21. Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
22. PM count setting value [EPU (K)]
23. PM count present value [EPU (K)]
24. PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
25. PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
26. PM count setting value [Developer material (K)]
27. PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
10
8 Supplier:
Name : SUPPLIER_NAME
Tel Number : 1122334455
E-Mail : supplier_emailaddress@cccc.xxx
Address : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
9 Customer:
Name : CUSTOMER_NAME
Tel Number : 1234567890
E-Mail : customer_emailaddress@dddd.xxx
Address : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
10 Service Technician:
Number : svc12
Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
Tel Number : 0987654321
E-Mail : svc@toshibatec.co.jp
Fig. 10-34
FG
HRNS-MAIN-SW-471
CN411
AC-SW-IN(L)
1 3
AC-SW-OUT(L)
2 4
Main switch 3
AC-SW-IN(N)
1
AC-SW-OUT(N)
4 2
HRNS-INTERLOCK-471
CN413
Front cover A
SW-OUT
1 CN412: Fuser unit
interlock switch B e-STUDIO355/455
Fuser front Fuser center
Switching regulator CN430:
e-STUDIO205L/255/305 J616 thermostat thermostat
(LVPS) 1
HTR_L
1
ADU interlock B
SW-IN
switch A 3 Center heater lamp
HTR1_N
2 2
CN414
SW-IN
A 3 Side heater lamp
Damp heater B
SW-OUT
1 HTR2_N
switch A HRNS-FUS2-471-J 3 3
B
Sub heater lamp
HRNS-FUS-471-J HTR3_N
4 4
(For other models)
HRNS-ACIN1-471(473)
VH-3pin:e-STUDIO205L/255/305
(For only e-STUDIO355/455)
VH-4pin:e-STUDIO355/455 HRNS-ACIN2-471(473)
J560 CN414
HRNS-FUS-471
1 1 3
3 3 1
(Mini Uni-3pin) HRNS-FUS2-471
CN415
4
J603
10
1 1
2 2
11
D-THR-N
D-THR-L
CN431 4 3 2 1 Scanner
LVPS J45 J46
2 2 2 Scanner damp
1 1 1 heater (Right)
Fuse PC board
CN432 Drum
AC(N:SCN-DH)
1
AC(L:SCN-DH)
D-HTR-SCN 3 J562 J568
AC(N:DRM-DH) HRNS-D/H-DRM-471
D-HTR-DRM 4 1 1 1
6
AC(L:DRM-DH)
2 2 2 Drum damp heater
HRNS-D/H-471 B A
(Faston-#250) (Faston-#250)
Drum damp
heater thermostat
CN433
1
D-HTR-CST
2
Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other models
Fig. 11-1
HRNS-LGC-IMG-471HF
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
A14 A14 REFCLK- DQ6 14 114 ODT0 12 9 23 23 B12 B6 +5VB 1 11 3 A11 A11
/RESET 12 12 AG 12 12 +5.1VB A[12] 12 12 SG IDATX[0] A11 A6 NC e-STUDIO205L/305
A15 A15 SG SG 15 115 /CS1 13 8 24 24 B11 B7 HRNS-ADU-MOT-471HF SG J658 A12
NC 13 13 +12VB 13 13 A[16] A[14] 13 13 SCD0 IDATX[2] A12 A5 SFBCLT-0A SFBCLT-0A HRNS-FEED-SW2-471HF
Bluetooth module
A16 A16 PERpO DQ7 16 116 A13 14 7 25 25 B10 B8 PFPCK-1A 3 12 2 A12
NC 14 14 +24VB 14 14 A[14] A[16] 14 14 SCD2 IDATX[4] CN404 A13 A4 SFB-CLT NC +24VD1
A17 A17 PERnO DQ2 17 117 VDD 15 6 26 26 B9 B9 J660 PG (CLT3) 2 13 1 A13 J670 J659
NC 15 15 16Hz 15 15 A[12] A[18] 15 15 SCD4 IDATX[6] ADUM+A A14 A3 +24V SG SG
A18 A18 SG SG 18 118 VDD 16 5 27 27 B8 B10 1 1 PG 1 B1 6 1 3
NC 16 16 AG 16 16 A[10] SG 16 16 SCD6 SG +24VD2 A15 A2 BTMFED-1 BTMFED-1 2ND-FEED-
B1 B1 +12VA DQ3 19 119 ODT1 17 4 28 28 B7 B11 2 2 PG B2 5 2 2 SNR(S14)
NC 17 17 CI 17 17 A[8] SG 17 17 SCD8 IVSYNC-0A ADUM-A A16 A1 PFP/LCF HRNS-SIDE-SW-471 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
B2 B2 +12VA DQ12 20 120 NC 18 3 29 29 B6 B12 3 3 ADU-MOT NC B3 4 3 1
NC 18 18 ANSDET 18 18 A[6] D[1] 18 18 SCD10 SG ADUM+B (M5) M B20
B3 B3 +12VA SG 21 121 SG 19 2 30 30 B5 B13 4 4 +24VD1 J687 J649 J654
SG SCD12 IHSYNC-0A +24VD2 B1 B19
PWA-F-MOT (MOT)
B5 B5 SMCLK DQ8 23 123 DQ32 32 32 B3 B15 6 6 PFPMP 1 2 1 B2 B5 2 5 2
21 21 INTHOOK 21 21 A[0] D[7] 21 21 SCD16 IRCLK-1A B3 B17 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE SNR(S13)
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
Copy key card RGST-SNR
B15 B15 PETnO SG 33 133 SG TXP 4 42 42 NC PFPCNT-0 J664 B11 3 5 2 (S22)
(10BASE-T/ 31 31 D[6] A[17] 31 31 SCD36 5 B13 B7 VCMFN-0A 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
B16 B16 SG SG 34 134 DQ38 TXCT 5 43 43 SG PFPRST-0 TRU-FAN 2 6 4 B8 B12 2 6 1
100BASE-TX) 32 32 D[8] ROMDET0-0 32 32 SCD38 6 B14 B6 M +24VD1 NC NC
B17 B17 /PRSNT2 DQ10 35 135 DQ34 RXCT 6 44 44 NC LCFCNT-0NC (M9) 1 7 3 B9 1 7
CN9 or CN4 33 33 D[10] +5.1VB 33 33 SCD40 7 B15 B5 NC +24VD1
B18 B18 SG DQ14 36 136 DQ39 RXN 7 CN502 45 45 LCFEMPF-1 8 2 B10
34 34 D[12] LEDDL-0 34 34 SCD42 B16 B4 J685B J685A NC YOBIFAN-0A HRNS-LGC-FAN-471HF
DQ11 37 137 DQ35 RXP 8 NC 1 1 TXB 46 46 NC 9 1 B11
35 35 D[14] SCD44 B3 (ADU-FG) (FG)
DQ15 38 138 SG LEDG-A 9 2 2 RXIN 47 47 NC CN317 J667
36 36 SG CN701 CN121 SCD46 B2 NC B12 +24VD1
SG 39 139 SG LEDG-C 10 3 3 CML 48 48 NC e-STUDIO205L/255 1 1 PU-FAN
37 37 MOD2DE -0
MOD2DET-0 +5.1VB SG B1 NC PUFAN-0A M
CN118 SG 40 140 DQ44 LEDY-A 11 4 4 LD 1 1 49 49 B13 2 2 (M2)
38 38 SG DA1 MCNT
1 1 /WAKE SG 41 141 DQ40 LEDY-C 12 5 5 ER/HK 2 2 50 50 J669
39 39 DREQC2-1 +5.1VB PHDEN B12 +24VD1
2 2 +3.3VA SG 42 142 DQ45 6 6 ATT3DB 3 3 51 51 3 1 POW-FAN
11.2 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO205L/255/305)
3 3 RESERVED DQ16 43 143 DQ41 7 7 RLADJ1 4 4 52 52 HRNS-LGC-FRT-471HF HRNS-EPU-471 HRNS-DLE2-471 HRNS-DLE-371 B13 4 2 (M7)
41 41 RXIN2 +5.1VB PVSHYNC
4 4 SG DQ20 44 144 SG 8 8 RLADJ2 5 5 53 53 J666
42 42 AG DD3 SG CN310 CN451 CN452 J407 +5VB
5 5 RESERVED DQ17 45 145 SG CN111 9 9 RGCLK 6 6 54 54 J626 J534 5 1
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
43 43 -12VB +5.1VB PRD0 DEVCNT-0 ERSLP-0A ERSLP-0A HMS-1A
MODEM board
6 6 +1.5VA DQ21 46 146 /DQS5 VBUS 1 10 10 AG 7 7 55 55 HRNS-LGC-EXIT-H-471 1 14 1 13 1 2 1 3 6 2 TEMP/MUMI
44 44 AG DD6 PRD2 ERSLP-0A +24VD1 +24VD1 PWA-F-DLE SG
7 7 /CLKREQ SG 47 147 DM5 D- 2 USB connector 11 11 -12VB 8 8 56 56 2 13 2 12 2 1 2 1 7 3 SNR (S25)
45 45 MD2IN -1
MD2INT-1 +5.1VB PRD4 J681 CN302 +24VD1 NC (DLE) TEMP-1A
8 8 RESERVED SG 48 148 DQS5 D+ 3 (Device) 12 12 AG 9 9 57 57 3 12 3 11 2 8 4
46 46 MOD2CS-0 DD9 PRD6 BRDEXIT-1 BRDEXIT-1 ATSVR-1A
9 9 SG /DQS2 49 149 SG SG 4 13 13 +12VB 10 10 58 58 15 1 4 11 4 10
47 47 MOD2RS -0
MOD2RST-0 SG SG 5VFUSE 5VFUSE ATS-1A HRNS-ATS-471 HRNS-LGC-CST-OP-471HF(1/2)
DDR2 SO-DIMM
10 10 RESERVED NC 50 150 SG 14 14 NC 11 11 59 59 14 2 5 10 5 9
C 48 48 SG DD12 CMD INOPTFUL-1 INOPTFUL-1 PG HRNS-FEED-UNIT-471HF C
11 11 REFCLK- DQS2 51 151 DQ42 CN108 15 15 16Hz 12 12 60 60 13 3 6 9 6 8 CN453 J627
49 49 RXEN2-1 SG SERR SG SG EEPROMCK
12 12 RESERVED DM2 52 152 DQ46 VBUS0 1 16 16 AG 13 13 61 61 12 4 7 8 7 7 PG PG CN315 J630 J633
50 50 MEMWRH2-0 SG SBSY INOPTSEL1 INOPTSEL1 EEPROMDO 1 1 SG SG
13 13 REFCLK+ SG 53 153 DQ43 D0- 2 17 17 CI 14 14 62 62 11 5 8 7 8 6 ATS-1A ATS-1A A1 14 1 3
51 51 MEMWRL2-0 SG CACK INOPTSEL2 INOPTSEL2 EEPROMDI 2 2 ATTNR-SNR CUEMP-1 PESON
14 14 RESERVED SG 54 154 DQ47 D0+ 3 18 18 ANSDET 15 15 63 63 10 6 9 6 9 5 +24VD1 +24VD1 A2 13 2 2 EMP-U-SNR
52 52 A[18] SG N/A INOPTSEL3 INOPTSEL3 EEPROMCS1 3 3 (S8) 5VFUSE +5V (S17)
15 15 SG DQ18 SG SG 64 64 9 7 4 ATSVR-1A ATSVR-1A
PWA-F-EPU (EPU)
55 55 A[13] +3.3VB L-BACK INOPTSNS INOPTSNS SG CN454 CUTOP-1 TUSON TOP-U-SNR
18 18 SG DQ23 58 158 DQ52 D1+ 7 22 22 NC 19 19 67 67 6 10 13 2 13 1 A5 10 5 2 (S16)
56 56 A[ 1]
A[11] INTRQ SIO-L INOPTSOL-0A INOPTSOL-0A NC DRTH-1A 5VFUSE +5V
19 19 RESERVED SG 59 159 DQ49 SG 8 23 23 +5.1VA 20 20 68 68 5 11 14 1 14 2 THMS-DRM A6 9 6 1
57 57 A[9] +3.3VB SG +24V +24VD1 SG (THMS4)
20 20 /W-DIS SG 60 160 DQ53 24 24 AG 21 21 69 69 4 12 1 J631
58 58 A[7] +5.1VA +5VB PG PG CURGC-0A PU-CON
21 21 SG DQ24 61 161 SG CN106 25 25 +5VA 22 22 70 70 3 13 J668 A7 8 7 3
59 59 A[5] -12VB +3.3VM OFFSET1A OFFSET1A FCOVSW-1 +24VD1 +24V NC CST-U-
22 22 /PERST DQ28 62 162 SG VBUS0 1 26 26 -12VB 23 23 71 71 2 14 15 2 FRONT-COV- A8 7 8 2 FEED-CLT
60 60 A[3] SG SG OFFSET2A OFFSET2A SG (CLT4)
23 23 PERnO DQ25 63 163 NC D0- 2 USB connector 27 27 AG 24 24 72 72 1 15 16 1 SW (SW4) HRNS-LGC-LDR-471 1
61 61 A[1] +12VB DATA1
24 24 +3.3Vaux DQ29 64 164 CK1 D0+ 3 (Internal) 28 28 +12VB 25 25 73 73 J632
62 62 CPURS -0
CPURST-0 DA0 DATA3 SG SG
25 25 PERpO SG 65 165 SG SG 4 29 29 NC 26 26 74 74 CN203 CN202 CN201 CN313 A9 6 9 3
63 63 CEP2IN -1
CEP2INT-1 DA2 DATA5 +5VB SG CUFLS-1 NREEMPON NEAR-EMP-
26 26 SG SG 66 166 /CK1 30 30 NC 27 27 75 75 3 1 1 1 A10 5 10 2 U-SNR
64 64 +5.1VB IDECS DATA7 PWA-F-SNS BDIN-0 +5VD 5VFUSE +5V (S15)
27 27 SG DM3 67 167 /DQ56 28 28 76 76 2 2 2 2 A11 4 11 1
65 65 +5.1VB DD1 ADD15 (SNS) SG +5VD NC NC
28 28 +1.5VA /DQS3 68 168 SG 29 29 77 77 1 3 3 3 3 12
66 66 IORD2-0 DD2 ADD17 SG NC NC
29 29 SG NC 69 169 DQ56 CN117 CN810 30 30 78 78 4 4 2 13
CN811 CN702 67 67 IOWR2-0 DD4 ADD19 WRLVL-1 NC NC
30 30 SMB-CLK DQS3 70 170 DM6 +12VB 31 31 79 79 5 5 1 14 J642
1 1 1 1 +24VB 68 68 D[1] DD5 ADD21 SG SG
31 31 PETnO SG 71 171 SG SG 32 32 80 80 6 6 A12 1 CST-U-SW
2 2 2 2 PG 69 69 D[3] DD7 ADD23 BDIN-0 CUSW-1
32 32 SMB-DATA SG 72 172 SG 33 33 81 81 7 7 A13 2 (SW6)
JPD model only 3 3 NC 70 70 D[5] DD8 ADD25 SG NC
33 33 PETpO DQ26 73 173 DQ50 34 34 82 82 8 8 A14
PWA-F-IMG (IMG)
71 71 D[7] DD10 ADD27 PIDT-1 HRNS-FEED-UNIT-471HF
34 34 SG DQ30 74 174 DQ54 35 35 83 83 J262 J262 9 9
CN812 CN401
PWA-F-MOT (MOT)
72 72 D[9] DD11 ADD29 J681 J260 J681 J260 PIDT-0
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
1 77 77 +5.1VB /DIOW SCNCTS 11 5 5 11 5 5 SG SG SG
40 40 SG CKE1 80 180 DQ60 TXD 3 3 -12VB 41 41 89 89 2 2 JSPFED-SNR 2 2 OCTFED-SNR 15 15 B4 11 4 3
2 Serial Port 78 78 CEP2CS-0 /DMACK SCNIN 10 6 6 10 6 6 +5VD CLTOP-1 TUSON TOP-L-SNR
11-3
A8 93 193 SG HRNS-SCN-APSA-470 (A4 series) CN19 CN132 102 102 3 3 3 3 1 14 J643
SCD17 Option Option HRNS-MAIN-MOT-471HF SG
A6 94 194 DQ63 CN17 HRNS-SCN-APSL-470 NC 103 103 B12 1 CST-L-SW
1 1 SCD19 CLSW-1 (SW7)
VDD 95 195 SDA 1 1 MDT[0] NC 104 104 1 1 J233 CN308 B13 2
J27 CN15 2 2 SCD21 OFS-MOT M 3.3V NC
VDD 96 196 SG 2 2 MDT[2] +5V NC 105 105 2 2 1 1 B14
3 1 3 3 SCD23 EEPROMCS HRNS-ACIN2-473 HRNS-SFUSE-471
A5 97 197 SCl 3 3 MDT[4] APS-R APSR NC 106 106 2 2 (Service parts)
CN112 2 2 4 4 SCD25 EEPROMCK HRNS-ACIN1-471
A4 98 198 SA0 VCC 4 4 MDT[6] (S5) SG NC 107 107 PWA-F-CTIF 3 3 J624 J460
1 1 3 5 5 SCD27 EEPROMDO
A3 99 199 VDD-SPD ROCK SYS-FAN-MOT 5 5 MRD NC 108 108 (CTIF) 4 4 1 1 1
2 M J26 6 6 SCD29 EEPROMDI PWA-F-SFUSE
A2 100 200 SA1 SG (M6) 6 6 PNLDT0 +5V NC 109 109 5 5 CN309 J622 2 2 2
3 3 4 7 7 SCD31 SG 3.3VSW
7 7 PNLDT2 APS-C APSC NC 110 110 HRNS-BRIDGE-MAIN-507 6 6 1 6 1
HRNS-HDD-471 2 5 8 8 SCD33 SG HRNS-EXIT-SW471
E 8 8 MAD[4] (S4) SG NC 111 111 2 5 2 E
1 6 9 9 SCD35 J802 FUSCUT-0A
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
CN114 9 9 MAD[6] NC 112 112 J647 3 4 3 J684 J625
J25 10 10 SCD37 J681 1 +24VD1 SG
5V NC 10 10 MAD[8] +5V NC 113 113 TNR-MOT 2 14 4 3 4 3 1 3
4 1 3 7 11 11 SCD39 15 1 2 EXT-SNR M (M4) TNRMTRON-0A EXTSW-1
CN107 SG NC 11 11 MAD[10] APS3 APS3 NC 114 114 1 15 5 2 5 2 2 2 EXIT-SNR
3 2 2 8 12 12 SCD41 14 2 3 NC 5VFUSE
SG NC 12 12 MAD[12] (S3) SG NC 115 115 16 6 1 6 1 3 1
2 3 1 9 13 13 SCD43 13 3 NC
CNT 1 13 13 MAD[14] SG 116 116 HRNS-BRIDGE-FULL-507 17
1 4 J24 14 14 SCD45 12 4
A17 2 14 14 MAD[16] +5V SCNCNT 117 117 J644 J621 J623
5 (HDD-POWER) 3 10 15 15 SCD47 11 5 J803 J806 MMTRBK-0A FUSCNT-1
SDA/SI 3 15 15 MAD[18] APS2 APS2 SG 118 118 8 7 7 7 1 1 8 2 THMS-C-HTR
6 (S2) 2 11 16 16 SG 10 6 1 3 1 NC MTH+-1A (THMS1)
SG 4 16 16 SG SG SCNCTS 119 119 NC 7 8 6 2 2 7 1
7 1 12 17 17 PVDEN0 9 7 2 2 2 FULL-SNR MMTRPLL-0 MTH-1A
SCL 5 17 17 SG SCNOUT 120 120 6 8 9 5 3 3 6
8 18 18 PDCLK 8 8 3 1 3 MMTRCCW-1A STH+-1A
INT/SO 6 18 18 MDT[1] SG 121 121 5 9 10 4 4 4 5 2 THMS-S-HTR
9 J23 19 19 SG 7 9 J801 MMTRCK-1A STH-1A (THMS2)
/CS 7 19 19 MDT[3] A4 +5V MMPIO 122 122 NC 4 10 11 3 5 5 4 1
10 3 13 20 20 PHSYNC 6 10 1 MMTRON-0A ETH+-1A
A13 8 20 20 MDT[5] series APS1 APS1 SG 123 123 FEED-COV- 3 11 12 2 6 6 3
11 HDD 2 14 21 21 SG 5 11 2 SNR (S13) SG ETH-1A
A12 9 21 21 MDT[7] only (S1) SG SCNRTS 124 124 MAIN-MOT 2 12 13 1 7 7 2 2 HTMS-EDG-
(SLG)
A15 12 NC 24 24 PNLDT3 HRNS-SCN-SNSR-470 SYSRST 127 127 NC GATE-SOL 4
15 25 25 PRD7 1 15 2 Option
A10 13 CN109 (HDD) 25 25 MAD[5] SG 128 128 3
J31 26 26 SG J805 CN305
A16 14 SG 26 26 MAD[7] TXOUT0- 129 129 2 +24VD1
1 1 3 CN16 27 27 SACK 1 A1
A9 15 A+ 27 27 MAD[9] PLTN-SNR SG TXOUT0+ 130 130 1 CTRON-0A
2 2 2 1 28 28 CBSY 2 OPEN-SW A2
/WR 16 A- 28 28 MAD[11] (S7) PLTN SG 131 131 J639 KCTRC-0
3 3 1 2 29 29 STS HRNS-PWR-MOT--471HF 3 A3
29 29 MAD[13] Option
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
/BLE 17 SG TXOUT1- 132 132 MCRUN-0A
PWA-F-SLG
(SATA) J30 SNSPS
4 4 3 30 30 CERR A4
D7 18 B+ 30 30 MAD[15] SG TXOUT1+ 133 133 CN403 EXTCTR-0A
5 5 3 4 31 31 LECLIFE A5
D8 19 B- 31 31 MAD[17] HOME-SNR HOME SG 134 134 +24VD2 PG
6 6 2 5 32 32 SCLK10 1 A6
Coin controller
(M1)
2 7 7 SG D2 28 DATA8 5 5 SCLK +3.3V 4 4 SG 6 TSIZE1-1A
XR 43 38 78 3 +24V 41 41 PG B5
SCAN-MOT
3 8 8 CPPOW D13 29 DATA10 6 6 SD0 +3.3V 5 5 5 TSIZE0-1A
Copy key card
YU 44 37 77 4 SCNMAB +24VD2 B6
TCP (TCP)
4 9 9 CPPSW D1 30 DATA12 7 7 CSBLUE +3.3V 6 6 4 Download jig (LGC) +5VB
45 36 76 5 +24VD2 B7
J424 10 10 SG D14 31 DATA14 8 8 SCLK +3.3V 3 CTRCNT2-0
46 35 75 6 PG B8
FRAWE 11 11 CP-RTS D0 32 A19 9 9 SD0 SG 8
1 47 34 74 7 PG
LOAD 12 12 SG D15 33 A17 10 10 CEGRN SG 7
2 48 33 73 8
CP 13 13 CP-CTS /BHE 34 A15 11 11 SCLK BD9 CN12 CN419 Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3 49 32 72 9
CN319
5 51 30 70 11 2 12 12 5 1 4
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
A[11]
D[11]
A[20]
A[18]
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
RD-0
A[19]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[21]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
D[13]
D[15]
LCD
FCTCNT-0
D/LROMCS2
8 54 27 67 14 5 10 10 8 4 1
D0 19 19 SG A3 40 A03 17 17 ACLP BD3 +5V +5VB HRNS-PWR-LGC-471HF
D/LROMCNT-0
9 55 26 66 15 6 8 8 2
D1 20 20 TXCLKP A6 41 A1 18 18 ADCLK BD2 LMPON
10 56 25 65 16 7 17 17 CN415 CN301
D2 21 21 TXCLKN A4 42 /RD 19 19 SG BD1 24VGND PG +5VB
11 57 24 64 17 PWA-F-SLG (SLG) 8 13 13 14 1 1
D3 22 22 SG A5 43 /CS0-A 20 20 SG BD0 +24V +24VD1 +5VB Option J1 CN320 HVPS HRNS-HVPS3-471
12 58 23 63 18 9 15 15 12 2 2
23 23 TXD2P 3.3VA 44 /CS0-B 21 21 +5V SG +5VB 1 1 SG
59 22 62 19 3 3 J424
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
24 24 TXD2N SG 45 +3.3VA 22 22 +5V SG NC SG 2 2 +5VB J608
DEV
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
J429 J426 60 21 61 20 9 16 4 HRNS-LGC-PS-SIG-471HF OUT3 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OUT3
10
25 25 SG 3.3VA 46 +3.3VA 23 23 +5V GD9 HRNS-SCN-ADF-470 NC SG 3 3 AD0
SCN15 61 20 60 21 J32 10 7 5 (DEV)
1 1 26 26 TXD1P SG 47 SG 24 24 SG GD8 +24VD1 SG 4 4 AD2
CN11
G SCN14 62 19 59 22 LP-EXPO (EXP) 1 1 16 16 11 8 6 CN300 CN421 HRNS-HVPS2-471 G
2 2 27 27 TXD1N A18 48 SG 25 25 SG GD7 +5VD 5 5 AD4 PG
SCN13 63 18 58 23 2 2 18 18 14 7 1 14
PWA-F-CCD (CCD)
3 3 28 28 SG RESET 49 DATA1 26 26 SG GD6 PG SG 6 6 AD6 +24VD1 J423
SG
SG
SCN12 64 17 57 24 3 3 14 14 13 9 8 2 13 GRID J607
DFTXD
DFCNT
4 4 29 29 TXD0P A19 50 DATA3 27 27 SH GD5 +24VD1 7 7 I/O0 HVTM-0A OUT2 1 OUT2
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
SCN11 65 16 56 25 19 9 3 12 (GRID)
5 5 30 30 TXD0N DATA5 28 28 CCDSW GD4 +24VD1 8 8 I/O0
I/O2 HVMVR-1 J427
RET0 66 15 55 26 21 10 4 11 J611
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
GB
J22
CN2
SG DATA7
10
6 6 31 31 29 29 CK2 GD3 +24VD1 9 9 I/O0
I/O4 HVDVR-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DATA9
10
7 7 30 30 CK1 GD2 +24V +24VD1 10 10 I/O0
I/O6 HVTAC-0A (GB)
RET2 68 13 53 28 1 24 12 6 9
8 8 HRNS-SYS-DSP-470 DATA11 31 31 SHMON GD1 LMPON PG 11 11 SG HVTTCHG-0A HRNS-HVPS1-471
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
RET3 69 12 52 29 2 13 13 7 8
9 9 PWR-EN DATA13 32 32 SHCLR GD0 (INV) 24VGND PG 12 12 WE HVTT-0A
RET8 1 20 70 1 51 30 3 15 14 8 7 J422
J606
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN2
11
DATA15
10
10 10 SYS-EN 33 33 CP SG PG 13 13 CSIP2-0
CSIP2-0A HVTVR-1 MG
RET9 2 19 71 10 50 31 17 15 9 6 OUT1 1 OUT1
11 11 PWR-DN A18 34 34 RS SG PG 14 14 +5VB (MG)
J21
PWA-F-DSP (DSP)
3 18 72 9 49 32 18 16 J425
NC A16 35 35 SG RD9 +5V +5V +5VB 15 15 IPCS -0
IPCSW-0 J609
4 17 73 8 48 33 CN1 14 14 1 1 6 6 4 FG TR
J428 J425 SG A14 36 36 SG RD8 SG SG SG 16 16 SG HVTGB-0A OUT4 1 OUT4
LDFC-1 5 16 74 7 47 34 1 12 12 2 2 5 5 3 10 5 (TR)
1 1 SG A12 37 37 +10.5V RD7 +24VB +24VB +24VD3 17 17 +5VB HVSAV-1
LDFC-2 6 15 75 6 46 35 RADF 2 17 17 3 3 4 4 15 CN431 11 4 J426
2 2 SG A10 38 38 +10.5V RD6 +24VB +24VB +24VD3 +5VB J599 J2 18 18 AD1 HVSDWN-1 SEP J610
LDFC-4 7 14 76 5 45 36 3 18 18 4 4 3 3 16 4 1 RXD RXD 12 3 OUT5 1 OUT5
3 3 SG A08 39 39 SG RD5 +24VGND +24VGND PG SG PWA-F-FUS (FUS) 1 1 19 19 AD3 HVCLK-0A (SEP)
IPC board / CNV board
LDFC-5 8 13 77 4 44 37 4 15 15 5 5 2 2 17 10 2 SG SG 13 2
4 4 +5VS A06 40 40 SG RD4 +24VGND +24VGND PG 2 2 20 20 AD5 HVAVR-1 HRNS-GB-FUSER-471
LDFC-6 9 12 78 3 43 38 5 16 16 6 6 1 1 18 HRNS-FUS-471 TXD TXD 14 1
5 5 +5VS A04 41 41 SG RD3 3 3 21 21 AD7
PWA-F-KEY (KEY)
LDFC-7 10 11 79 2 42 39 JDR Model :Standard SG SG J612 J611
6 6 SG A02 42 42 SG RD2 4 4 22 22 I/O0
I/O1 FG
LDFC-8 11 10 80 1 41 40 FG 20 20 FG Other Model:Option FG
7 7 +5VA A0 43 43 Option NC 5 5 23 23 I/O0
I/O3
LDFC-9 12 9 11 F-CNT
8 8 +5VA A20 44 44 NC 6 6 24 24 I/O0
I/O5 CN416
LDFC-10 13 8 12 Finisher CNT-GND NC
9 9 SG /CS0 45 45 7 7 25 25 I/O0
I/O7 PWRDN-1
LDFC-11 14 7 5 +5VB 15 6
10 10 +12VA +3.3VA 46 46 8 8 26 26 SG SG
PWA-ACC (LVPS)
LDFC-12 15 6 6 SG F-CNT 16 5
11 11 +12VA RMSL 47 47 9 9 27 27 OE HTR1ON-1A
LDFC-13 16 5 23 NC CNT-GND 17 4
12 12 SG /WR 48 48 10 10 28 28 IPCRST-0 HTR2ON-1A
LDFC-15 17 4 20 +24VD4 18 3
13 13 SG SG 49 49 11 29 29 +5VB HTRASTON-1A
LDON0 18 3 PG 19 2
H 14 14 NC SG 50 50 12 30 30 SG HTRRLYOFF-1 H
LDON1 19 2 20 1
15 15 +5VB
SG 20 1
16 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11.3 Electric Parts Layout (e-STUDIO205L/255/305)
[A] Scanner unit, control panel [B] Power supply, developer unit [C] Laser unit, fuser unit, toner cartridge [D] Drive unit
S5 ERS SYS
S4 HDD
M1 IMG
THMO1
CCD S8 THMS2 MOT
INV M6
SLG
THMS3 S9 M5
DH2 LGC
S7
THMS1
S6 S3
S1 THMO2
S2
THMO3 M4
KEY
EXP LAMP3 M8
SW3
M2 CTIF
TCP
LAMP1
DH1 CTRG S25
P-INV THMS4
LAMP2
HVPS
DSP SNS
SW2 M7
THMO4
LDR
LVPS
EPU FUS
M3
SW4
DH3
SW1
[E] Automatic duplexing unit, transfer unit, exit unit [F] Bypass feed unit [G] Drawer unit
M11 CLT6
M10 CLT7
S11
S13
SFB
S14
M9
CLT1
CLT2
S21
CLT5
S15
S10 S16
S22 M12
S12
S17
S18
SW6 S19
SW7 S20
11-4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HRNS-LGC-IMG-471HF
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
A14 A14 REFCLK- DQ6 14 114 ODT0 12 9 23 23 B12 B6 1 15 +5VB 1 11 3 A11 A11
/RESET 12 12 AG 12 12 +5.1VB A[12] 12 12 SG IDATX[0] A11 A6 e-STUDIO355
A15 A15 SG SG 15 115 /CS1 13 8 24 24 B11 B7 SG J658 A12
NC 13 13 +12VB 13 13 A[16] A[14] 13 13 SCD0 IDATX[2] A12 A5 SFBCLT-0A SFBCLT-0A HRNS-FEED-SW2-471HF
Bluetooth module
A16 A16 PERpO DQ7 16 116 A13 14 7 25 25 B10 B8 HRNS-LGC-MOT-L-471HF PFPCK-1A 3 12 2 A12
NC 14 14 +24VB 14 14 A[14] A[16] 14 14 SCD2 IDATX[4] A13 A4 SFB-CLT NC +24VD1
A17 A17 PERnO DQ2 17 117 VDD 15 6 26 26 B9 B9 PG (CLT3) 2 13 1 A13 J670 J659
NC 15 15 16Hz 15 15 A[12] A[18] 15 15 SCD4 IDATX[6] CN402 CN303 A14 A3 +24V SG SG
A18 A18 SG SG 18 118 VDD 16 5 27 27 B8 B10 PG 1 B1 6 1 3
NC 16 16 AG 16 16 A[10] SG 16 16 SCD6 SG +5VB +5VB A15 A2 BTMFED-1 BTMFED-1 2ND-FEED-
B1 B1 +12VA DQ3 19 119 ODT1 17 4 28 28 B7 B11 12 1 PG B2 5 2 2 SNR(S14)
NC 17 17 CI 17 17 A[8] SG 17 17 SCD8 IVSYNC-0A SG SG A16 A1 PFP/LCF HRNS-SIDE-SW-471 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
B2 B2 +12VA DQ12 20 120 NC 18 3 29 29 B6 B12 11 2 NC B3 4 3 1
NC 18 18 ANSDET
ANSDE 18 18 A[6] D[1] 18 18 SCD10 SG EXTVR-1 EXTVR-1 B20
B3 B3 +12VA SG 21 121 SG 19 2 30 30 B5 B13 10 3 +24VD1 J687 J649 J654
SG IHSYNC-0A EXTMEN-1A EXTMEN-1A B1
PWA-F-MOT2 (MOT2)
20 20 REVB 20 20 A[2] D[5] 20 20 SCD14 SG EXTMDIR-0A EXTMDIR-0A B2 B18 (SW5) SG SG CSTSIDESW-1 CSTSIDESW-1 FEED-COV-
B5 B5 SMCLK DQ8 23 123 DQ32 32 32 B3 B15 8 5 PFPMPLL-0 1 2 1 B2 B5 2 5 2
21 21 INTHOOK 21 21 A[0] D[7] 21 21 SCD16 IRCLK-1A EXTMCK-1A EXTMCK-1A B3 B17 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE SNR(S13)
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
Copy key card RGST-SNR
B15 B15 PETnO SG 33 133 SG TXP 4 42 42 NC PFPCNT-0 J664 B11 3 5 2 (S22)
(10BASE-T/ 31 31 D[6] A[17] 31 31 SCD36 5 CN401 CN304 B13 B7 VCMFN-0A 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
B16 B16 SG SG 34 134 DQ38 TXCT 5 43 43 SG PFPRST-0 TRU-FAN 2 6 4 B8 B12 2 6 1
32 32 D[8] ROMDET0-0 32 32 SCD38 6 REVVR-1 REVVR-1 B14 B6
11.4 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO355/455)
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
5 5 RESERVED DQ17 45 145 SG CN111 9 9 RGCLK 6 6 54 54 J626 J534 5 1
43 43 -12VB +5.1VB PRD0 DEVCNT-0 ERSLP-0A ERSLP-0A HMS-1A
MODEM board
6 6 +1.5VA DQ21 46 146 /DQS5 VBUS 1 10 10 AG 7 7 55 55 CN404 1 14 1 13 1 3 1 3 6 2 TEMP/MUMI
44 44 AG DD6 PRD2 J660 ERSLP-0A +24VD1 +24VD1 PWA-F-DLE SG
7 7 /CLKREQ SG 47 147 DM5 D- 2 USB connector 11 11 -12VB 8 8 56 56 ADUM+A 2 13 2 12 2 1 3 1 7 3 SNR (S25)
45 45 MD2INT-1
MD2IN -1 +5.1VB PRD4 1 1 +24VD1 NC NC (DLE) TEMP-1A
8 8 RESERVED SG 48 148 DQS5 D+ 3 (Device) 12 12 AG 9 9 57 57 +24VD2 3 12 3 11 2 2 2 8 4
46 46 MOD2CS-0 DD9 PRD6 2 2 ATSVR-1A
9 9 SG /DQS2 49 149 SG SG 4 13 13 +12VB 10 10 58 58 ADUM-A 4 11 4 10
47 47 MOD2RST-0
MOD2RS -0 SG SG 3 ATS-1A HRNS-ATS-471 HRNS-LGC-CST-OP-471HF(1/2)
DDR2 SO-DIMM
3 ADU-MOT
10 10 RESERVED NC 50 150 SG 14 14 NC 11 11 59 59 ADUM+B M 5 10 5 9
C 48 48 SG DD12 CMD 4 4 (M5) PG HRNS-FEED-UNIT-471HF C
11 11 REFCLK- DQS2 51 151 DQ42 CN108 15 15 16Hz 12 12 60 60 +24VD2 6 9 6 8 CN453 J627
49 49 RXEN2-1 SG SERR 5 5 EEPROMCK
12 12 RESERVED DM2 52 152 DQ46 VBUS0 1 16 16 AG 13 13 61 61 ADUM-B 7 8 7 7 PG PG CN315 J630 J633
50 50 MEMWRH2-0 SG SBSY 6 6 EEPROMDO 1 1 SG SG
13 13 REFCLK+ SG 53 153 DQ43 D0- 2 17 17 CI 14 14 62 62 8 7 8 6 ATS-1A ATS-1A A1 14 1 3
51 51 MEMWRL2-0 SG CACK EEPROMDI 2 2 ATTNR-SNR CUEMP-1 PESON
14 14 RESERVED SG 54 154 DQ47 D0+ 3 18 18 ANSDET
ANSDE 15 15 63 63 HRNS-MOT-EXIT-L-473 HRNS-EXIT-UNIT-L-473 9 6 9 5 +24VD1 +24VD1 A2 13 2 2 EMP-U-SNR
52 52 A[18] SG N/A EEPROMCS1 3 3 (S8) 5VFUSE +5V (S17)
15 SG DQ18 155 64 ATSVR-1A ATSVR-1A
PWA-F-EPU (EPU)
55 55 A[13] +3.3VB L-BACK 1 8 1 5 SG CN454 CUTOP-1 TUSON TOP-U-SNR
18 18 SG DQ23 58 158 DQ52 D1+ 7 22 22 NC 19 19 67 67 EXITM+B 13 2 13 1 A5 10 5 2 (S16)
56 56 A[11]
A[ 1] INTRQ SIO-L 2 7 2 4 EXIT-MOT NC DRTH-1A 5VFUSE +5V
19 19 RESERVED SG 59 159 DQ49 SG 8 23 23 +5.1VA
+5.1 20 20 68 68 EXITM-A M 14 1 14 2 THMS-DRM A6 9 6 1
57 57 A[9] +3.3VB SG 3 6 3 3 (M10) SG (THMS4)
20 20 /W-DIS SG 60 160 DQ53 24 24 AG 21 21 69 69 EXITM-B 1 J631
58 58 A[7] +5.1VA +5VB 4 5 4 2 CURGC-0A PU-CON
21 21 SG DQ24 61 161 SG CN106 25 25 +5VA
+5 22 22 70 70 +24VD2 J668 A7 8 7 3
59 59 A[5] -12VB +3.3VM 5 4 5 1 FCOVSW-1 +24VD1 +24V NC CST-U-
22 22 /PERST DQ28 62 162 SG VBUS0 1 26 26 -12VB 23 23 71 71 15 2 FRONT-COV- A8 7 8 2 FEED-CLT
60 60 A[3] SG SG J637 SG HRNS-LGC-LDR-471 (CLT4)
23 23 PERnO DQ25 63 163 NC D0- 2 USB connector 27 27 AG 24 24 72 72 SG 16 1 SW (SW4) 1
61 61 A[1] +12VB DATA1 6 3 6 3
24 24 +3.3Vaux DQ29 64 164 CK1 D0+ 3 (Internal) 28 28 +12VB 25 25 73 73 OCTHOME-1 J632
62 62 CPURST-0
CPURS -0 DA0 DATA3 7 2 7 2 OCT-HOME- CN203 CN202 CN201 CN313 SG SG
25 25 PERpO SG 65 165 SG SG 4 29 29 NC 26 26 74 74 5VFUSE SNR (S24) +5VB SG A9 6 9 3
63 63 CEP2IN -1
CEP2INT-1 DA2 DATA5 8 1 8 1 3 1 1 1 CUFLS-1 NREEMPON NEAR-EMP-
26 26 SG SG 66 166 /CK1 30 30 NC 27 27 75 75 PWA-F-SNS BDIN-0 +5VD A10 5 10 2 U-SNR
64 64 +5.1VB IDECS DATA7 2 2 2 2 5VFUSE +5V (S15)
27 27 SG DM3 67 167 /DQ56 28 28 76 76 (SNS) SG +5VD A11 4 11 1
65 65 +5.1VB DD1 ADD15 HRNS-MOT-EXIT-U-473 HRNS-EXIT-UNIT-U-473 1 3 3 3 NC NC
28 28 +1.5VA /DQS3 68 168 SG 29 29 77 77 SG 3 12
66 66 IORD2-0 DD2 ADD17 4 4 NC NC
29 29 SG NC 69 169 DQ56 CN117 CN810 30 30 78 78 CN406 WRLVL-1 2 13
CN811 CN702 67 67 IOWR2-0 DD4 ADD19 J678 J662 5 5 NC NC
30 30 SMB-CLK DQS3 70 170 DM6 +12VB 31 31 79 79 REVM+A SG 1 14 J642
1 1 1 1 +24VB 68 68 D[1] DD5 ADD21 1 12 1 5 6 6 SG
31 31 PETnO SG 71 171 SG SG 32 32 80 80 REVM+B BDIN-0 A12 1 CST-U-SW
2 2 2 2 PG 69 69 D[3] DD7 ADD23 2 11 2 4 7 7 CUSW-1
32 32 SMB-DATA SG 72 172 SG 33 33 81 81 REVM-A SG A13 2 (SW6)
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
JPD model only 3 3 NC 70 70 D[5] DD8 ADD25 3 10 3 3 8 8 NC
33 33 PETpO DQ26 73 173 DQ50 34 34 82 82 REVM-B REV-MOT M PIDT-1 A14
PWA-F-IMG (IMG)
71 71 D[7] DD10 ADD27 4 9 4 2 (M14) 9 9 HRNS-FEED-UNIT-471HF
34 34 SG DQ30 74 174 DQ54 CN812 CN401 35 35 83 83 24VD2 PIDT-0
PWA-F-MOT2 (MOT2)
72 72 D[9] DD11 ADD29 5 8 5 1 10 10
11-5
3 e-STUDIO855 series: 2-3 SCD15 2 14 2 3 NC NC
A8 93 193 SG HRNS-SCN-APSA-470 (A4 series) CN19 CN132 102 102 BRGFULL-1 1 14 J643
SCD17 3 13 3 HRNS-MAIN-MOT-471HF SG
A6 94 194 DQ63 CN17 HRNS-SCN-APSL-470 NC 103 103 SG HRNS-BRIDGE-FULL-507 B12 1 CST-L-SW
1 1 SCD19 4 12 4 CLSW-1 (SW7)
VDD 95 195 SDA 1 1 MDT[0] NC 104 104 NC J233 CN308 B13 2
J27 CN15 2 2 SCD21 11 5 J803 J806 3.3V NC
VDD 96 196 SG 2 2 MDT[2] +5V NC 105 105 BRGCNT-0 1 1 B14
3 1 3 3 SCD23 5 10 6 1 3 1 EEPROMCS HRNS-ACIN2-473 HRNS-SFUSE-471
A5 97 197 SCL 3 3 MDT[4] APS-R APSR NC 106 106 NC NC 2 2 (Service parts)
CN112 2 2 4 4 SCD25 9 7 2 2 2 FULL-SNR EEPROMCK HRNS-ACIN1-473
A4 98 198 SA0 VCC 4 4 MDT[6] (S5) SG NC 107 107 BRGOPEN-1 PWA-F-CTIF 3 3 J624 J460
1 1 3 5 5 SCD27 6 8 8 3 1 3 EEPROMDO
A3 99 199 VDD-SPD ROCK SYS-FAN-MOT 5 5 MRD NC 108 108 BRGFED-1 (CTIF) 4 4 1 1 1
2 M J26 6 6 SCD29 7 7 9 J801 EEPROMDI PWA-F-SFUSE
A2 100 200 SA1 SG (M6) 6 6 PNLDT0 +5V NC 109 109 NC NC 5 5 CN309 J622 2 2 2
3 3 4 7 7 SCD31 6 10 1 SG 3.3VSW
7 7 PNLDT2 APS-C APSC NC 110 110 BRGSOL-0 FEED-COV- 6 6 1 6 1
2 5 8 8 SCD33 8 5 11 2 SG HRNS-EXIT-SW471
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
E HRNS-HDD-471 8 8 MAD[4] (S4) SG NC 111 111 +24VD2 SNR (S13) 2 5 2 E
1 6 9 9 SCD35 9 4 12 3 FUSCUT-0A
CN114 9 9 MAD[6] NC 112 112 NC NC J647 3 4 3 J684 J625
J25 10 10 SCD37 3 13 J804 +24VD1 SG
5V NC 10 10 MAD[8] +5V NC 113 113 NC NC TNR-MOT 2 14 4 3 4 3 1 3
4 1 3 7 11 11 SCD39 2 14 1 M (M4) TNRMTRON-0A EXTSW-1
CN107 SG NC 11 11 MAD[10] APS3 APS3 NC 114 114 NC NC GATE-SOL 1 15 5 2 5 2 2 2 EXIT-SNR
3 2 2 8 12 12 SCD41 1 15 2 NC 5VFUSE
SG NC 12 12 MAD[12] (S3) SG NC 115 115 16 6 1 6 1 3 1
2 3 1 9 13 13 SCD43 J805 NC
CNT 1 13 13 MAD[14] SG 116 116 17
1 4 J24 14 14 SCD45 1
A17 2 14 14 MAD[16] +5V SCNCNT 117 117 J644 J621 J623
5 (HDD-POWER) 3 10 15 15 SCD47 2 OPEN-SW MMTRBK-0A FUSCNT-1
SDA/SI 3 15 15 MAD[18] APS2 APS2 SG 118 118 8 7 7 7 1 1 8 2 THMS-C-HTR
6 (S2) 2 11 16 16 SG Option 3 NC MTH+-1A (THMS1)
SG 4 16 16 SG SG SCNCTS 119 119 7 8 6 2 2 7 1
7 1 12 17 17 PVDEN0 MMTRPLL-0 MTH-1A
SCL 5 17 17 SG SCNOUT 120 120 6 8 9 5 3 3 6
8 18 18 PDCLK MMTRCCW-1A STH+-1A
INT/SO 6 18 18 MDT[1] SG 121 121 5 9 10 4 4 4 5 2 THMS-S-HTR
9 J23 19 19 SG MMTRCK-1A STH-1A (THMS2)
/CS 7 19 19 MDT[3] A4 +5V MMPIO 122 122 HRNS-MOT-JSP-473 HRNS-JSP-SW-506 4 10 11 3 5 5 4 1
10 3 13 20 20 PHSYNC MMTRON-0A ETH+-1A
A13 8 20 20 MDT[5] series APS1 APS1 SG 123 123 CN409 3 11 12 2 6 6 3
11 HDD 2 14 21 21 SG J680 J452 SG ETH-1A
A12 9 21 21 MDT[7] only (S1) SG SCNRTS 124 124 SG MAIN-MOT 2 12 13 1 7 7 2 2 HTMS-EDG-
PWA-F-IMG (IMG)
A15 12 NC 24 24 PNLDT3 HRNS-SCN-SNSR-470 SYSRST 127 127 H-JSPCNT-0 4
15 25 25 PRD7 4 2 4 Option
A10 13 CN109 (HDD) 25 25 MAD[5] SG 128 128 SG 3
J31 26 26 SG 5 1 5 CN305
A16 14 SG 26 26 MAD[7] TXOUT0- 129 129 2 +24VD1
1 1 3 CN16 27 27 SACK Option A1
A9 15 A+ 27 27 MAD[9] PLTN-SNR SG TXOUT0+ 130 130 1 CTRON-0A
2 2 2 1 28 28 CBSY A2
/WR 16 A- 28 28 MAD[11] (S7) PLTN SG 131 131 J639 KCTRC-0
3 3 1 2 29 29 STS HRNS-PWR-MOT--471HF A3
/BLE 17 SG (SATA) 29 29 MAD[13] SNSPS TXOUT1- 132 132 MCRUN-0A
4 4 J30 3 30 30 CERR A4
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
30 30 MAD[15]
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
(M1)
2 7 7 SG D2 28 DATA8 5 5 SCLK +3.3V 4 4 SG 6 TSIZE1-1A
XR 43 38 78 3 +24V 41 41 PG B5
SCAN-MOT
3 8 8 CPPOW D13 29 DATA10 6 6 SD0 +3.3V 5 5 5 TSIZE0-1A
Copy key card
YU 44 37 77 4 SCNMAB +24VD2 B6
TCP (TCP)
4 9 9 CPPSW D1 30 DATA12 7 7 CSBLUE +3.3V 6 6 4 Download jig (LGC) +5VB
45 36 76 5 +24VD2 B7
J424 10 10 SG D14 31 DATA14 8 8 SCLK +3.3V 3 CTRCNT2-0
46 35 75 6 PG B8
FRAWE 11 11 CP-RTS D0 32 A19 9 9 SD0 SG 8
1 47 34 74 7 PG
LOAD 12 12 SG D15 33 A17 10 10 CEGRN SG 7
2 48 33 73 8
CP 13 13 CP-CTS /BHE 34 A15 11 11 SCLK BD9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5 51 30 70 11 2 12 12 5 1 4
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
A[11]
D[11]
A[20]
A[18]
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
RD-0
A[19]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[21]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
D[13]
D[15]
LCD
FCTCNT-0
D/LROMCS2
8 54 27 67 14 5 10 10 8 4 1
D0 19 19 SG A3 40 A03 17 17 ACLP BD3 +5V +5VB HRNS-PWR-LGC-471HF
D/LROMCNT-0
9 55 26 66 15 6 8 8 2
D1 20 20 TXCLKP A6 41 A1 18 18 ADCLK BD2 LMPON
10 56 25 65 16 7 17 17 CN415 CN301
D2 21 21 TXCLKN A4 42 /RD 19 19 SG BD1 24VGND PG +5VB
11 57 24 64 17 8 13 13 14 1 1
D3 22 22 SG A5 43 /CS0-A 20 20 SG BD0 +24V +24VD1 +5VB Option J1 CN320 HVPS HRNS-HVPS3-471
12 58 23 63 18 9 15 15 12 2 2
23 23 TXD2P 3.3VA 44 /CS0-B 21 21 +5V SG +5VB 1 1 SG
59 22 62 19 3 3 J424
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
24 24 TXD2N SG 45 +3.3VA 22 22 +5V SG NC SG 2 2 +5VB J608
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
60 21 61 20 9 16 4 DEV
J429 J426 HRNS-LGC-PS-SIG-473HF OUT3 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AD0 OUT3
10
25 25 SG 3.3VA 46 +3.3VA 23 23 +5V GD9 HRNS-SCN-ADF-470 NC SG 3 3
SCN15 61 20 60 21 J32 10 7 5 (DEV)
1 1 26 26 TXD1P SG 47 SG 24 24 SG GD8 +24VD1 SG 4 4 AD2
CN11
G SCN14 62 19 59 22 LP-EXPO (EXP) 1 1 16 16 11 8 6 CN300 CN420 HRNS-HVPS2-471 G
2 2 27 27 TXD1N A18 48 SG 25 25 SG GD7 +5VD 5 5 AD4 PG
SCN13 63 18 58 23 2 2 18 18 14 7 1 9
PWA-F-CCD (CCD)
3 3 28 28 SG RESET 49 DATA1 26 26 SG GD6 PG SG 6 6 AD6 +24VD1 J423
SG
SG
SCN12 64 17 57 24 3 3 14 14 13 9 8 2 8 GRID J607
DFTXD
DFCNT
4 4 29 29 TXD0P A19 50 DATA3 27 27 SH GD5 +24VD1 7 7 I/O0 HVTM-0A OUT2 1 OUT2
SCN11 65 16 56 25 19 9 3 7 (GRID)
I/O0
I/O2
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
5 5 30 30 TXD0N DATA5 28 28 CCDSW GD4 +24VD1 8 8 HVMVR-1 J427
RET0 66 15 55 26 21 10 4 6 J611
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
GB
J22
CN2
SG DATA7 29 29 I/O0
I/O4
10
6 6 31 31 CK2 GD3 +24VD1 9 9 HVDVR-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DATA9 30 30 I/O0
I/O6
10
7 7 CK1 GD2 +24V +24VD1 10 10 HVTAC-0A (GB)
RET2 68 13 53 28 1 24 12 6 4
8 8 HRNS-SYS-DSP-470 DATA11 31 31 SHMON GD1 LMPON PG 11 11 SG HVTTCHG-0A HRNS-HVPS1-471
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
RET3 69 12 52 29 2 13 13 7 3
9 9 PWR-EN DATA13 32 32 SHCLR GD0 (INV) 24VGND PG 12 12 WE HVTT-0A
RET8 1 20 70 1 51 30 3 15 14 8 2 J422
J606
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN2
CSIP2-0A
CSIP2-0
11
10 10 SYS-EN DATA15 33 33 CP SG 10 PG 13 13 HVTVR-1 MG
RET9 2 19 71 10 50 31 17 15 9 1 OUT1 1 OUT1
11 11 PWR-DN A18 34 34 RS SG PG 14 14 +5VB (MG)
J21
PWA-F-DSP (DSP)
3 18 72 9 49 32 18 16 J425
NC A16 35 35 SG RD9 +5V +5V +5VB 15 15 IPCSW-0
IPCS -0 J609
4 17 73 8 48 33 CN1 14 14 1 1 6 6 4 FG CN421 TR
J428 J425 SG A14 36 36 SG RD8 SG SG SG 16 16 SG HVTGB-0A OUT4 1 OUT4
LDFC-1 5 16 74 7 47 34 1 12 12 2 2 5 5 3 10 5 (TR)
1 1 SG A12 37 37 +10.5V RD7 +24VB +24VB +24VD3 17 17 +5VB HVSAV-1
LDFC-2 6 15 75 6 46 35 RADF 2 17 17 3 3 4 4 15 CN431 11 4 J426
2 2 SG A10 38 38 +10.5V RD6 +24VB +24VB +24VD3 +5VB J599 J2 18 18 AD1 HVSDWN-1 SEP J610
LDFC-4 7 14 76 5 45 36 3 18 18 4 4 3 3 16 4 1 RXD RXD 12 3 OUT5 1 OUT5
3 3 SG A08 39 39 SG RD5 +24VGND +24VGND PG SG PWA-F-FUS (FUS) 1 1 19 19 AD3 HVCLK-0A (SEP)
IPC board / CNV board
LDFC-5 8 13 77 4 44 37 4 15 15 5 5 2 2 17 10 2 SG SG 13 2
4 4 +5VS A06 40 40 SG RD4 +24VGND +24VGND PG 2 2 20 20 AD5 HVAVR-1 HRNS-GB-FUSER-471
LDFC-6 9 12 78 3 43 38 5 16 16 6 6 1 1 18 HRNS-FUS-471 TXD TXD 14 1
5 5 +5VS A04 41 41 SG RD3 3 3 21 21 AD7
PWA-F-KEY (KEY)
LDFC-7 10 11 79 2 42 39 JDR Model :Standard SG SG J612 J611
6 6 SG A02 42 42 SG RD2 4 4 22 22 I/O1
I/O0 FG
LDFC-8 11 10 80 1 41 40 FG 20 20 FG Other Model:Option FG
7 7 +5VA A0 43 43 Option NC 5 5 23 23 I/O3
I/O0
LDFC-9 12 9 11 F-CNT
8 8 +5VA A20 44 44 NC 6 6 24 24 I/O5
I/O0 CN416
LDFC-10 13 8 12 Finisher CNT-GND NC
9 9 SG /CS0 45 45 7 7 25 25 I/O7
I/O0 PWRDN-1
LDFC-11 14 7 5 +5VB 15 6
10 10 +12VA +3.3VA 46 46 8 8 26 26 SG SG
PWA-ACC (LVPS)
LDFC-12 15 6 6 SG F-CNT 16 5
11 11 +12VA RMSL 47 47 9 9 27 27 OE HTR1ON-1A
LDFC-13 16 5 23 NC CNT-GND 17 4
12 12 SG /WR 48 48 10 10 28 28 IPCRST-0 HTR2ON-1A
LDFC-15 17 4 20 +24VD4 18 3
13 13 SG SG 49 49 11 29 29 +5VB HTRASTON-1A
LDON0 18 3 PG 19 2
H 14 14 NC SG 50 50 12 30 30 SG HTRRLYOFF-1 H
LDON1 19 2 20 1
15 15 +5VB
SG 20 1
16 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11.5 Electric Parts Layout (e-STUDIO355/455)
[A] Scanner unit, control panel [B] Power supply, developer unit [C] Laser unit, fuser unit, toner cartridge [D] Drive unit
S5 ERS SYS
S4 HDD
M1 IMG
THMO1
CCD S8 THMS2 MOT2
INV M6
SLG
THMS3 S9 M5
DH2 LGC
S7
THMS1
S6 S3
S1 THMO2
S2
THMO3 M4
KEY
EXP LAMP3 M8
SW3
M2 CTIF
TCP
LAMP1
DH1 CTRG S25
P-INV THMS4
LAMP2
HVPS
DSP SNS
SW2 M7
THMO4
LDR
LVPS
EPU FUS
M3
SW4
DH3
SW1
[E] Automatic duplexing unit, transfer unit, exit unit [F] Bypass feed unit [G] Drawer unit
M11 CLT6
SOL1 CLT7
M14
S11 S13
SFB
M10
S14
S24
S23
M9
CLT1
CLT2
M13
S21
CLT5
S15
S10 S16
S22 M12
S12
S17
S18
SW6 S19
SW7 S20
11-6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HRNS-LGC-IMG-471HF
CN131 CN312
3.3V HRNS-LGC-FEED-471HF (e-STUDIO255)
A17 A1
IVDEN-0 HRNS-LGC-FEED-472HF (e-STUDIO205L/305)
A16 A2 PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
SG
PWA-F-SYS (SYS) A15 A3 CN316
IHDEN-0 J648
A14 A4 RGTCL-0A
SG A1 2 RGST-CLT
A13 A5 +24VD1 (CLT2)
IDCLK-1 HRNS-LGC-ADU-471HF (e-STUDIO205L/255) A2 1
A12 A6 HRNS-LGC-ADU-472HF (e-STUDIO305)
SG HRNS-ADU-UNIT-471 J640
A11 A7 HRNS-LGC-MOT-L-471HF Option CLTRMU-0A
Option IDATX[7] A3 2 TRAY-U-MOT
CN110 CN110 A10 A8 CN525 J652 J674 CN311 CLTRMU-1A M
A IDATX[5] SG SG A4 1 (M11) A
CN116 A9 A9 CN402 CN303 NC 3 1 13 A1
Option Option IDATX[3] +5VB +5VB A20 ADUTR2-1 J641
A1 A1 /PRSNT1 VREF 1 101 A1 A8 A10 12 1 NC ADU-TR2-SNR 2 ADUTR2-1 2 12 A2 CLTRML-0A
IDATX[1] SG SG A19 (S11) +5V 5VFUSE A5 2 TRAY-L-MOT
A2 A2 +12VA SG 2 102 A0 CN102 CN9 or CN4 CN401 A7 A11 11 2 NC 1 3 11 A3 CLTRML-1A M
VDD CN501 CN600 CN602 SG EXTVR-1 EXTVR-1 A18 A6 1 (M12)
A3 A3 +12VA SG 3 103 VDD 1 20 A6 A12 10 3 CN318 NC J653
NC 1 1 TXOUT 1 1 TXOUT2 D[0] 1 1 SERR-0 EXTMEN-1A EXTMEN-1A A17 SG SG J646
A4 A4 SG DQ4 4 104 VDD 2 19 A5 A13 9 4 CLKB-1A 3 4 10 A4 1STCLL-0A
NC 2 2 RXIN 2 2 +5VA D[2] 2 2 SACK-0 EXTMDIR-0A EXTMDIR-0A A1 A16 ADUTR1-1 A7 3
A5 A5 TCK DQ0 5 105 A10/AP 3 18 A4 A14 8 5 CLKC-1A ADU-TR1-SNR 2 ADUTR1-1 5 9 A5 +24VD1 NC TR-M-CLT
D- 3 3 CML 3 3 +12VB D[4] 3 3 CMD-0 EXTMCK-1A EXTMCK-1A A2 A15 (S10) +5V 5VFUSE A8 2
A6 A6 TD1 DQ5 6 106 BA1 4 17 A3 A15 7 6 DRV0-1A 1 6 8 A6 (CLT7)
D+ 4 4 LD 4 4 +3.3VB D[6] 4 4 CBSY-0 ADUVR-1 ADUVR-1 A3 A14 1
A7 A7 TD0 DQ1 7 107 BA0 5 16 A2 A16 6 7 DRV1-1A J655
NC 5 5 EXTRG 5 5 MOD2DMA-1 RD-0 5 5 SG ADUMEN-1A ADUMEN-1A A4 A13 +24V +24VD1 J645
A8 A8 TMS SG 8 108 /RAS 6 15 A1 A17 5 8 DRV2-1A 3 7 7 A7 1STCLH-0A
NC 6 6 ATT3DB 6 6 SG A[0] 6 6 SYSRST-0 MOTRST-0 MOTRST-0 A5 A12 NC ADUCL-0A A9 3
A9 A9 +3.3VA SG 9 109 /WE 7 14 B17 B1 4 9 DRV3-1A ADU-CLT 2 8 6 A8 +24VD1 NC TR-U-CLT
DETACH 7 7 RLADJ1 7 7 MEM2CS-0 A[2] 7 7 CERR-0A ADUMDIR-0A ADUMDIR-0A A6 A11 (CLT1) ADUCL-0A A10 2
A10 A10 +3.3VA DM0 10 110 /CS0 8 13 B16 B2 3 10 DRV4-1A 1 (CLT6)
NC 8 8 RLADJ2 8 8 +5.1VB A[4] 8 8 CACK-0A ADUMCK-1A ADUMCK-1A A7 A10 1
A11 A11 /RESET /DQS0 11 111 VDD 9 12 B15 B3 2 11 DRV5-1A J657
SG 9 9 RGCLK 9 9 MEMRD2-0 A[6] 9 9 STS-0A MOTCNT-0 MOTCNT-0 A8 A9 SG SG A11
A12 A12 SG SG 12 112 VDD 10 11 B14 B4 1 12 DRV6-1A 3 9 5 A9 e-STUDIO255
NC 10 10 AG 10 10 CLKOE-1 A[8] 10 10 SBSY-0A A9 A8 SFBEMP-1 A12
A13 A13 REFCLK+ DQS0 13 113 /CAS 11 10 B13 B5 DRV7-1A SFB-EMP-SNR 2 SFBEMP-1 10 4 A10
NC 11 11 -12VB 11 11 TXEN2-1 A[10] 11 11 SG A10 A7 (S12) 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE NC
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
A14 A14 REFCLK- DQ6 14 114 ODT0 12 9 B12 B6 +5VB 1 11 3 A11 A11
/RESET 12 12 AG 12 12 +5.1VB A[12] 12 12 IDATX[0] A11 A6 NC e-STUDIO205L/305
A15 A15 SG SG 15 115 /CS1 13 8 B11 B7 HRNS-ADU-MOT-471HF SG J658 A12
NC 13 13 +12VB 13 13 A[16] A[14] 13 13 IDATX[2] A12 A5 SFBCLT-0A SFBCLT-0A HRNS-FEED-SW2-471HF
Bluetooth module
A16 A16 PERpO DQ7 16 116 A13 14 7 B10 B8 PFPCK-1A 3 12 2 A12
NC 14 14 +24VB 14 14 A[14] A[16] 14 14 IDATX[4] CN404 A13 A4 SFB-CLT NC +24VD1
A17 A17 PERnO DQ2 17 117 VDD 15 6 B9 B9 J660 PG (CLT3) 2 13 1 A13 J670 J659
NC 15 15 16Hz 15 15 A[12] A[18] 15 15 IDATX[6] ADUM+A A14 A3 +24V SG SG
A18 A18 SG SG 18 118 VDD 16 5 B8 B10 1 1 PG 1 B1 6 1 3
NC 16 16 AG 16 16 A[10] SG 16 16 SG +24VD2 A15 A2 BTMFED-1 BTMFED-1 2ND-FEED-
B1 B1 +12VA DQ3 19 119 ODT1 17 4 B7 B11 2 2 PG B2 5 2 2 SNR(S14)
NC 17 17 CI 17 17 A[8] SG 17 17 IVSYNC-0A ADUM-A A16 A1 PFP/LCF HRNS-SIDE-SW-471 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
B2 B2 +12VA DQ12 20 120 NC 18 3 B6 B12 3 3 ADU-MOT NC B3 4 3 1
NC 18 18 ANSDET 18 18 A[6] D[1] 18 18 SG ADUM+B (M5) M B20
B3 B3 +12VA SG 21 121 SG 19 2 B5 B13 4 4 +24VD1 J687 J649 J654
SG 19 19 19 19 IHSYNC-0A +24VD2 B1 B19
PWA-F-MOT (MOT)
B5 B5 SMCLK DQ8 23 123 DQ32 B3 B15 6 6 PFPMP 1 2 1 B2 B5 2 5 2
21 21 INTHOOK 21 21 A[0] D[7] 21 21 IRCLK-1A B3 B17 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE SNR(S13)
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
Copy key card RGST-SNR
B15 B15 PETnO SG 33 133 SG TXP 4 NC PFPCNT-0 J664 B11 3 5 2 (S22)
(10BASE-T/ 31 31 D[6] A[17] 31 31 5 B13 B7 VCMFN-0A 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
B16 B16 SG SG 34 134 DQ38 TXCT 5 SG PFPRST-0 TRU-FAN 2 6 4 B8 B12 2 6 1
100BASE-TX) 32 32 D[8] ROMDET0-0 32 32 6 B14 B6 M +24VD1 NC NC
B17 B17 /PRSNT2 DQ10 35 135 DQ34 RXCT 6 NC LCFCNT-0NC (M9) 1 7 3 B9 1 7
CN9 or CN4 33 33 D[10] +5.1VB 33 33 7 B15 B5 NC +24VD1
B18 B18 SG DQ14 36 136 DQ39 RXN 7 CN502 LCFEMPF-1 8 2 B10
34 34 D[12] LEDDL-0 34 34 B16 B4 J685B J685A NC YOBIFAN-0A HRNS-LGC-FAN-471HF
DQ11 37 137 DQ35 RXP 8 NC 1 1 TXB NC 9 1 B11
35 35 D[14] B3 (ADU-FG) (FG)
DQ15 38 138 SG LEDG-A 9 2 2 RXIN NC CN317 J667
36 36 SG CN701 CN121 B2 NC B12 +24VD1
SG 39 139 SG LEDG-C 10 3 3 CML NC e-STUDIO205L/255 1 1 PU-FAN
37 37 MOD2DE -0
MOD2DET-0 +5.1VB B1 NC PUFAN-0A M
CN118 SG 40 140 DQ44 LEDY-A 11 4 4 LD 1 1 B13 2 2 (M2)
38 38 SG DA1
1 1 /WAKE SG 41 141 DQ40 LEDY-C 12 5 5 ER/HK 2 2 J669
39 39 DREQC2-1 +5.1VB B12 +24VD1
2 2 +3.3VA SG 42 142 DQ45 6 6 ATT3DB 3 3 e-STUDIO305 3 1 POW-FAN
40 40 DACKC2-0 DD0 PSFANON-0A M
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
3 3 RESERVED DQ16 43 143 DQ41 7 7 RLADJ1 4 4 HRNS-LGC-FRT-471HF HRNS-EPU-471 HRNS-DLE2-471 HRNS-DLE-371 B13 4 2 (M7)
41 41 RXIN2 +5.1VB
4 4 SG DQ20 44 144 SG 8 8 RLADJ2 5 5 J666
42 42 AG DD3 CN310 CN451 CN452 J407 +5VB
5 5 RESERVED DQ17 45 145 SG CN111 9 9 RGCLK 6 6 J626 J534 5 1
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
43 43 -12VB +5.1VB DEVCNT-0 ERSLP-0A ERSLP-0A HMS-1A
MODEM board
6 6 +1.5VA DQ21 46 146 /DQS5 VBUS 1 10 10 AG 7 7 HRNS-LGC-EXIT-H-471 1 14 1 13 1 2 1 3 6 2 TEMP/MUMI
44 44 AG DD6 ERSLP-0A +24VD1 +24VD1 PWA-F-DLE SG
7 7 /CLKREQ SG 47 147 DM5 D- 2 USB connector 11 11 -12VB 8 8 2 13 2 12 2 1 2 1 7 3 SNR (S25)
45 45 MD2IN -1
MD2INT-1 +5.1VB J681 CN302 +24VD1 NC (DLE) TEMP-1A
8 8 RESERVED SG 48 148 DQS5 D+ 3 (Device) 12 12 AG 9 9 3 12 3 11 2 8 4
46 46 MOD2CS-0 DD9 BRDEXIT-1 BRDEXIT-1 ATSVR-1A
9 9 SG /DQS2 49 149 SG SG 4 13 13 +12VB 10 10 15 1 4 11 4 10
47 47 MOD2RS -0
MOD2RST-0 SG 5VFUSE 5VFUSE ATS-1A HRNS-ATS-471 HRNS-LGC-CST-OP-471HF(1/2)
DDR2 SO-DIMM
10 10 RESERVED NC 50 150 SG 14 14 NC 11 11 14 2 5 10 5 9
C 48 48 SG DD12 INOPTFUL-1 INOPTFUL-1 PG HRNS-FEED-UNIT-471HF C
11 11 REFCLK- DQS2 51 151 DQ42 CN108 15 15 16Hz 12 12 13 3 6 9 6 8 CN453 J627
49 49 RXEN2-1 SG SG SG EEPROMCK
12 12 RESERVED DM2 52 152 DQ46 VBUS0 1 16 16 AG 13 13 12 4 7 8 7 7 PG PG CN315 J630 J633
50 50 MEMWRH2-0 SG INOPTSEL1 INOPTSEL1 EEPROMDO 1 1 SG SG
13 13 REFCLK+ SG 53 153 DQ43 D0- 2 17 17 CI 14 14 11 5 8 7 8 6 ATS-1A ATS-1A A1 14 1 3
51 51 MEMWRL2-0 SG INOPTSEL2 INOPTSEL2 EEPROMDI 2 2 ATTNR-SNR CUEMP-1 PESON
14 14 RESERVED SG 54 154 DQ47 D0+ 3 18 18 ANSDET 15 15 10 6 9 6 9 5 +24VD1 +24VD1 A2 13 2 2 EMP-U-SNR
52 52 A[18] SG INOPTSEL3 INOPTSEL3 EEPROMCS1 3 3 (S8) 5VFUSE +5V (S17)
15 15 SG DQ18 SG SG 9 7 4 ATSVR-1A ATSVR-1A
PWA-F-EPU (EPU)
55 55 A[13] +3.3VB INOPTSNS INOPTSNS SG CN454 CUTOP-1 TUSON TOP-U-SNR
18 18 SG DQ23 58 158 DQ52 D1+ 7 22 22 NC 19 19 6 10 13 2 13 1 A5 10 5 2 (S16)
56 56 A[ 1]
A[11] INTRQ INOPTSOL-0A INOPTSOL-0A NC DRTH-1A 5VFUSE +5V
19 19 RESERVED SG 59 159 DQ49 SG 8 23 23 +5.1VA 20 20 5 11 14 1 14 2 THMS-DRM A6 9 6 1
57 57 A[9] +3.3VB +24V +24VD1 SG (THMS4)
20 20 /W-DIS SG 60 160 DQ53 24 24 AG 21 21 4 12 1 J631
58 58 A[7] +5.1VA PG PG CURGC-0A PU-CON
21 21 SG DQ24 61 161 SG CN106 25 25 +5VA 22 22 3 13 J668 A7 8 7 3
59 59 A[5] -12VB OFFSET1A OFFSET1A FCOVSW-1 +24VD1 +24V NC CST-U-
22 22 /PERST DQ28 62 162 SG VBUS0 1 26 26 -12VB 23 23 2 14 15 2 FRONT-COV- A8 7 8 2 FEED-CLT
60 60 A[3] SG OFFSET2A OFFSET2A SG (CLT4)
23 23 PERnO DQ25 63 163 NC D0- 2 USB connector 27 27 AG 24 24 1 15 16 1 SW (SW4) HRNS-LGC-LDR-471 1
61 61 A[1] +12VB
24 24 +3.3Vaux DQ29 64 164 CK1 D0+ 3 (Internal) 28 28 +12VB 25 25 J632
62 62 CPURST-0
CPURS -0 DA0 SG SG
25 25 PERpO SG 65 165 SG SG 4 29 29 NC 26 26 CN203 CN202 CN201 CN313 A9 6 9 3
63 63 CEP2IN -1
CEP2INT-1 DA2 +5VB SG CUFLS-1 NREEMPON NEAR-EMP-
26 26 SG SG 66 166 /CK1 30 30 NC 27 27 3 1 1 1 A10 5 10 2 U-SNR
64 64 +5.1VB IDECS PWA-F-SNS BDIN-0 +5VD 5VFUSE +5V (S15)
27 27 SG DM3 67 167 /DQ56 28 28 2 2 2 2 A11 4 11 1
65 65 +5.1VB DD1 (SNS) SG +5VD NC NC
28 28 +1.5VA /DQS3 68 168 SG 29 29 1 3 3 3 3 12
66 66 IORD2-0 DD2 SG NC NC
29 29 SG NC 69 169 DQ56 CN117 CN810 30 30 4 4 2 13
CN811 CN702 67 67 IOWR2-0 DD4 WRLVL-1 NC NC
30 30 SMB-CLK DQS3 70 170 DM6 +12VB 31 31 5 5 1 14 J642
1
11.6 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO205L/255/305 for SYS-IMG board)
PWA-F-MOT (MOT)
72 72 D[9] DD11 J681 J260 J681 J260 PIDT-0
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
1 77 77 +5.1VB /DIOW 11 5 5 11 5 5 SG SG SG
40 40 SG CKE1 80 180 DQ60 TXD 3 3 -12VB 41 41 2 2 JSPFED-SNR 2 2 OCTFED-SNR 15 15 B4 11 4 3
2 Serial Port 78 78 CEP2CS-0 /DMACK 10 6 6 10 6 6 +5VD CLTOP-1 TUSON TOP-L-SNR
11-7
J27 2 2 OFS-MOT M 3.3V NC
VDD 96 196 SG 2 2 MDT[2] +5V NC 2 2 1 1 B14
3 1 3 3 EEPROMCS HRNS-ACIN2-473 HRNS-SFUSE-471
A5 97 197 SCl 3 3 MDT[4] APS-R APSR NC 2 2 (Service parts)
CN112 2 2 4 4 EEPROMCK HRNS-ACIN1-471
A4 98 198 SA0 VCC 4 4 MDT[6] (S5) SG NC PWA-F-CTIF 3 3 J624 J460
1 1 3 5 5 EEPROMDO
A3 99 199 VDD-SPD ROCK SYS-FAN-MOT 5 5 MRD NC (CTIF) 4 4 1 1 1
2 M J26 6 6 EEPROMDI PWA-F-SFUSE
A2 100 200 SA1 SG (M6) 6 6 PNLDT0 +5V NC 5 5 CN309 J622 2 2 2
3 3 4 7 7 SG 3.3VSW
7 7 PNLDT2 APS-C APSC NC HRNS-BRIDGE-MAIN-507 6 6 1 6 1
HRNS-HDD-471 2 5 8 8 SG HRNS-EXIT-SW471
E 8 8 MAD[4] (S4) SG NC 2 5 2 E
1 6 9 9 J802 FUSCUT-0A
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
CN114 9 9 MAD[6] NC J647 3 4 3 J684 J625
J25 10 10 J681 1 +24VD1 SG
5V NC 10 10 MAD[8] +5V NC TNR-MOT 2 14 4 3 4 3 1 3
4 1 3 7 11 11 15 1 2 EXT-SNR M (M4) TNRMTRON-0A EXTSW-1
CN107 SG NC 11 11 MAD[10] APS3 APS3 NC 1 15 5 2 5 2 2 2 EXIT-SNR
3 2 2 8 12 12 14 2 3 NC 5VFUSE
SG NC 12 12 MAD[12] (S3) SG NC 16 6 1 6 1 3 1
2 3 1 9 13 13 13 3 NC
CNT 1 13 13 MAD[14] SG HRNS-BRIDGE-FULL-507 17
1 4 J24 14 14 12 4
A17 2 14 14 MAD[16] +5V SCNCNT J644 J621 J623
5 (HDD-POWER) 3 10 15 15 11 5 J803 J806 MMTRBK-0A FUSCNT-1
SDA/SI 3 15 15 MAD[18] APS2 APS2 SG 8 7 7 7 1 1 8 2 THMS-C-HTR
6 (S2) 2 11 16 16 10 6 1 3 1 NC MTH+-1A (THMS1)
SG 4 16 16 SG SG SCNCTS NC 7 8 6 2 2 7 1
7 1 12 17 17 9 7 2 2 2 FULL-SNR MMTRPLL-0 MTH-1A
SCL 5 17 17 SG SCNOUT 6 8 9 5 3 3 6
8 18 18 8 8 3 1 3 MMTRCCW-1A STH+-1A
INT/SO 6 18 18 MDT[1] SG 5 9 10 4 4 4 5 2 THMS-S-HTR
9 J23 19 19 7 9 J801 MMTRCK-1A STH-1A (THMS2)
/CS 7 19 19 MDT[3] A4 +5V MMPIO NC 4 10 11 3 5 5 4 1
10 3 13 20 20 6 10 1 MMTRON-0A ETH+-1A
A13 8 20 20 MDT[5] series APS1 APS1 SG FEED-COV- 3 11 12 2 6 6 3
11 HDD 2 14 21 21 5 11 2 SNR (S13) SG ETH-1A
A12 9 21 21 MDT[7] only (S1) SG SCNRTS MAIN-MOT 2 12 13 1 7 7 2 2 HTMS-EDG-
A11 11 NC SG NC
14 24 24 2 14 1
(SLG)
A15 12 NC 24 24 PNLDT3 HRNS-SCN-SNSR-470 SYSRST NC GATE-SOL 4
15 25 25 1 15 2 Option
A10 13 CN109 (HDD) 25 25 MAD[5] SG 3
J31 26 26 J805 CN305
A16 14 SG 26 26 MAD[7] TXOUT0- 2 +24VD1
1 1 3 CN16 27 27 1 A1
A9 15 A+ 27 27 MAD[9] PLTN-SNR SG TXOUT0+ 1 CTRON-0A
2 2 2 1 28 28 2 OPEN-SW A2
/WR 16 A- 28 28 MAD[11] (S7) PLTN SG J639 KCTRC-0
3 3 1 2 29 29 HRNS-PWR-MOT--471HF 3 A3
29 29 MAD[13] Option
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
/BLE 17 SG TXOUT1- MCRUN-0A
PWA-F-SLG
(SATA) J30 SNSPS
4 4 3 30 30 A4
D7 18 B+ 30 30 MAD[15] SG TXOUT1+ CN403 EXTCTR-0A
5 5 3 4 31 31 A5
D8 19 B- 31 31 MAD[17] HOME-SNR HOME SG +24VD2 PG
6 6 2 5 32 32 1 A6
Coin controller
(M1)
2 7 7 SG D2 28 DATA8 5 5 SCLK +3.3V 4 4 SG 6 TSIZE1-1A
XR 43 38 78 3 +24V 41 41 PG B5
SCAN-MOT
3 8 8 CPPOW D13 29 DATA10 6 6 SD0 +3.3V 5 5 5 TSIZE0-1A
Copy key card
YU 44 37 77 4 SCNMAB +24VD2 B6
TCP (TCP)
4 9 9 CPPSW D1 30 DATA12 7 7 CSBLUE +3.3V 6 6 4 Download jig (LGC) +5VB
45 36 76 5 +24VD2 B7
J424 10 10 SG D14 31 DATA14 8 8 SCLK +3.3V 3 CTRCNT2-0
46 35 75 6 PG B8
FRAWE 11 11 CP-RTS D0 32 A19 9 9 SD0 SG 8
1 47 34 74 7 PG
LOAD 12 12 SG D15 33 A17 10 10 CEGRN SG 7
2 48 33 73 8
CP 13 13 CP-CTS /BHE 34 A15 11 11 SCLK BD9 CN12 CN419 Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3 49 32 72 9
CN319
5 51 30 70 11 2 12 12 5 1 4
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
A[11]
D[11]
A[20]
A[18]
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
RD-0
A[19]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[21]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
D[13]
D[15]
LCD
FCTCNT-0
D/LROMCS2
8 54 27 67 14 5 10 10 8 4 1
D0 19 19 SG A3 40 A03 17 17 ACLP BD3 +5V +5VB HRNS-PWR-LGC-471HF
D/LROMCNT-0
9 55 26 66 15 6 8 8 2
D1 20 20 TXCLKP A6 41 A1 18 18 ADCLK BD2 LMPON
10 56 25 65 16 7 17 17 CN415 CN301
D2 21 21 TXCLKN A4 42 /RD 19 19 SG BD1 24VGND PG +5VB
11 57 24 64 17 PWA-F-SLG (SLG) 8 13 13 14 1 1
D3 22 22 SG A5 43 /CS0-A 20 20 SG BD0 +24V +24VD1 +5VB Option J1 CN320 HVPS HRNS-HVPS3-471
12 58 23 63 18 9 15 15 12 2 2
23 23 TXD2P 3.3VA 44 /CS0-B 21 21 +5V SG +5VB 1 1 SG
59 22 62 19 3 3 J424
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
24 24 TXD2N SG 45 +3.3VA 22 22 +5V SG NC SG 2 2 +5VB J608
DEV
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
J429 J426 60 21 61 20 9 16 4 HRNS-LGC-PS-SIG-471HF OUT3 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OUT3
10
25 25 SG 3.3VA 46 +3.3VA 23 23 +5V GD9 HRNS-SCN-ADF-470 NC SG 3 3 AD0
SCN15 61 20 60 21 J32 10 7 5 (DEV)
1 1 26 26 TXD1P SG 47 SG 24 24 SG GD8 +24VD1 SG 4 4 AD2
CN11
G SCN14 62 19 59 22 LP-EXPO (EXP) 1 1 16 16 11 8 6 CN300 CN421 HRNS-HVPS2-471 G
2 2 27 27 TXD1N A18 48 SG 25 25 SG GD7 +5VD 5 5 AD4 PG
SCN13 63 18 58 23 2 2 18 18 14 7 1 14
PWA-F-CCD (CCD)
3 3 28 28 SG RESET 49 DATA1 26 26 SG GD6 PG SG 6 6 AD6 +24VD1 J423
SG
SG
SCN12 64 17 57 24 3 3 14 14 13 9 8 2 13 GRID J607
DFTXD
DFCNT
4 4 29 29 TXD0P A19 50 DATA3 27 27 SH GD5 +24VD1 7 7 I/O0 HVTM-0A OUT2 1 OUT2
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
SCN11 65 16 56 25 19 9 3 12 (GRID)
5 5 30 30 TXD0N DATA5 28 28 CCDSW GD4 +24VD1 8 8 I/O0
I/O2 HVMVR-1 J427
RET0 66 15 55 26 21 10 4 11 J611
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
GB
J22
CN2
SG DATA7
10
6 6 31 31 29 29 CK2 GD3 +24VD1 9 9 I/O0
I/O4 HVDVR-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DATA9
10
7 7 30 30 CK1 GD2 +24V +24VD1 10 10 I/O0
I/O6 HVTAC-0A (GB)
RET2 68 13 53 28 1 24 12 6 9
8 8 HRNS-SYS-DSP-470 DATA11 31 31 SHMON GD1 LMPON PG 11 11 SG HVTTCHG-0A HRNS-HVPS1-471
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
RET3 69 12 52 29 2 13 13 7 8
9 9 PWR-EN DATA13 32 32 SHCLR GD0 (INV) 24VGND PG 12 12 WE HVTT-0A
RET8 1 20 70 1 51 30 3 15 14 8 7 J422
J606
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN2
11
DATA15
10
10 10 SYS-EN 33 33 CP SG PG 13 13 CSIP2-0
CSIP2-0A HVTVR-1 MG
RET9 2 19 71 10 50 31 17 15 9 6 OUT1 1 OUT1
11 11 PWR-DN A18 34 34 RS SG PG 14 14 +5VB (MG)
J21
PWA-F-DSP (DSP)
3 18 72 9 49 32 18 16 J425
NC A16 35 35 SG RD9 +5V +5V +5VB 15 15 IPCS -0
IPCSW-0 J609
4 17 73 8 48 33 CN1 14 14 1 1 6 6 4 FG TR
J428 J425 SG A14 36 36 SG RD8 SG SG SG 16 16 SG HVTGB-0A OUT4 1 OUT4
LDFC-1 5 16 74 7 47 34 1 12 12 2 2 5 5 3 10 5 (TR)
1 1 SG A12 37 37 +10.5V RD7 +24VB +24VB +24VD3 17 17 +5VB HVSAV-1
LDFC-2 6 15 75 6 46 35 RADF 2 17 17 3 3 4 4 15 CN431 11 4 J426
2 2 SG A10 38 38 +10.5V RD6 +24VB +24VB +24VD3 +5VB J599 J2 18 18 AD1 HVSDWN-1 SEP J610
LDFC-4 7 14 76 5 45 36 3 18 18 4 4 3 3 16 4 1 RXD RXD 12 3 OUT5 1 OUT5
3 3 SG A08 39 39 SG RD5 +24VGND +24VGND PG SG PWA-F-FUS (FUS) 1 1 19 19 AD3 HVCLK-0A (SEP)
IPC board / CNV board
LDFC-5 8 13 77 4 44 37 4 15 15 5 5 2 2 17 10 2 SG SG 13 2
4 4 +5VS A06 40 40 SG RD4 +24VGND +24VGND PG 2 2 20 20 AD5 HVAVR-1 HRNS-GB-FUSER-471
LDFC-6 9 12 78 3 43 38 5 16 16 6 6 1 1 18 HRNS-FUS-471 TXD TXD 14 1
5 5 +5VS A04 41 41 SG RD3 3 3 21 21 AD7
PWA-F-KEY (KEY)
LDFC-7 10 11 79 2 42 39 JDR Model :Standard SG SG J612 J611
6 6 SG A02 42 42 SG RD2 4 4 22 22 I/O0
I/O1 FG
LDFC-8 11 10 80 1 41 40 FG 20 20 FG Other Model:Option FG
7 7 +5VA A0 43 43 Option NC 5 5 23 23 I/O0
I/O3
LDFC-9 12 9 11 F-CNT
8 8 +5VA A20 44 44 NC 6 6 24 24 I/O0
I/O5 CN416
LDFC-10 13 8 12 Finisher CNT-GND NC
9 9 SG /CS0 45 45 7 7 25 25 I/O0
I/O7 PWRDN-1
LDFC-11 14 7 5 +5VB 15 6
10 10 +12VA +3.3VA 46 46 8 8 26 26 SG SG
PWA-ACC (LVPS)
LDFC-12 15 6 6 SG F-CNT 16 5
11 11 +12VA RMSL 47 47 9 9 27 27 OE HTR1ON-1A
LDFC-13 16 5 23 NC CNT-GND 17 4
12 12 SG /WR 48 48 10 10 28 28 IPCRST-0 HTR2ON-1A
LDFC-15 17 4 20 +24VD4 18 3
13 13 SG SG 49 49 11 29 29 +5VB HTRASTON-1A
LDON0 18 3 PG 19 2
H 14 14 NC SG 50 50 12 30 30 SG HTRRLYOFF-1 H
LDON1 19 2 20 1
15 15 +5VB
SG 20 1
16 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11.7 Electric Parts Layout (e-STUDIO205L/255/305 for SYS-IMG board)
[A] Scanner unit, control panel [B] Power supply, developer unit [C] Laser unit, fuser unit, toner cartridge [D] Drive unit
S5 ERS SYS-IMG
S4 HDD
M1
THMO1
CCD S8 THMS2 MOT
INV M6
SLG
THMS3 S9 M5
DH2 LGC
S7
THMS1
S6 S3
S1 THMO2
S2
THMO3 M4
KEY
EXP LAMP3 M8
SW3
M2 CTIF
TCP
LAMP1
DH1 CTRG S25
P-INV THMS4
LAMP2
HVPS
DSP SNS
SW2 M7
THMO4
LDR
LVPS
EPU FUS
M3
SW4
DH3
SW1
[E] Automatic duplexing unit, transfer unit, exit unit [F] Bypass feed unit [G] Drawer unit
M11 CLT6
M10 CLT7
S11
S13
SFB
S14
M9
CLT1
CLT2
S21
CLT5
S15
S10 S16
S22 M12
S12
S17
S18
SW6 S19
SW7 S20
Electromagnetic clutches
Wire harness
Symbol Name Figure
location
ADU-CLT
CLT1 [E] 7-A
ADU clutch
RGST-CLT
CLT2 [E] 8-A
Registration roller clutch
SFB-CLT
CLT3 [F] 7-B
Bypass feed clutch
CST-U-FEED-CLT
CLT4 [G] 8-C
Upper drawer feed clutch
CST-L-FEED-CLT
CLT5 [G] 8-D
Lower drawer feed clutch
TR-U-CLT
CLT6 [G] -
High speed transport clutch
TR-M-CLT
CLT7 [G] -
Low speed transport clutch
11-8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HRNS-LGC-IMG-471HF
CN131 CN312
3.3V HRNS-LGC-FEED-471HF (e-STUDIO355)
A17 A1
IVDEN-0 HRNS-LGC-FEED-472HF (e-STUDIO455)
A16 A2 PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
SG
PWA-F-SYS (SYS) A15 A3 CN316
IHDEN-0 J648
A14 A4 RGTCL-0A
SG A1 2 RGST-CLT
A13 A5 HRNS-LGC-ADU-471HF (e-STUDIO355) +24VD1 (CLT2)
IDCLK-1 A2 1
A12 A6 HRNS-LGC-EXIT-H-473HF HRNS-LGC-ADU-472HF (e-STUDIO455)
SG HRNS-ADU-UNIT-471 J640
A11 A7 Option CLTRMU-0A
Option IDATX[7] A3 2 TRAY-U-MOT
CN110 CN110 A10 A8 CN400 CN302 J652 J674 CN311 CLTRMU-1A M
A IDATX[5] BRDEXIT-1 BRDEXIT-1 CN525 SG SG A4 1 (M11) A
CN116 A9 A9 15 1 NC 3 1 13 A1
Option Option IDATX[3] 5VFUSE 5VFUSE A20 ADUTR2-1 J641
A1 A1 /PRSNT1 VREF 1 101 A1 A8 A10 14 2 NC ADU-TR2-SNR 2 ADUTR2-1 2 12 A2 CLTRML-0A
IDATX[1] INOPTFUL-1 INOPTFUL-1 A19 (S11) +5V 5VFUSE A5 2 TRAY-L-MOT
A2 A2 +12VA SG 2 102 A0 CN102 CN9 or CN4 CN401 A7 A11 13 3 NC 1 3 11 A3 CLTRML-1A M
VDD CN501 CN600 CN602 SG SG SG A18 A6 1 (M12)
A3 A3 +12VA SG 3 103 VDD 1 20 A6 A12 12 4 CN318 NC J653
NC 1 1 TXOU
TXOUT 1 1 TXOUT2 D[0] 1 1 SERR-0 INOPTSEL1 INOPTSEL1 A17 SG SG J646
A4 A4 SG DQ4 4 104 VDD 2 19 A5 A13 11 5 CLKB-1A 3 4 10 A4 1STCLL-0A
NC 2 2 RXIN 2 2 +5VA
+5 D[2] 2 2 SACK-0 INOPTSEL2 INOPTSEL2 A1 A16 ADUTR1-1 A7 3
A5 A5 TCK DQ0 5 105 A10/AP 3 18 A4 A14 10 6 CLKC-1A ADU-TR1-SNR 2 ADUTR1-1 5 9 A5 +24VD1 NC TR-M-CLT
D- 3 3 CML
CM 3 3 +12VB D[4] 3 3 CMD-0 INOPTSEL3 INOPTSEL3 A2 A15 (S10) +5V 5VFUSE A8 2
A6 A6 TD1 DQ5 6 106 BA1 4 17 A3 A15 9 7 DRV0-1A 1 6 8 A6 (CLT7)
D+ 4 4 LD 4 4 +3.3VB D[6] 4 4 CBSY-0 INOPTCOV-1 INOPTCOV-1 A3 A14 1
A7 A7 TD0 DQ1 7 107 BA0 5 16 A2 A16 8 8 DRV1-1A J655
NC 5 5 EXTRG 5 5 MOD2DMA-1 RD-0 5 5 SG INOPTFED-1 INOPTFED-1 A4 A13 +24V +24VD1 J645
A8 A8 TMS SG 8 108 /RAS 6 15 A1 A17 7 9 DRV2-1A 3 7 7 A7 1STCLH-0A
NC 6 6 ATT3DB
TT3DB 6 6 SG A[0] 6 6 SYSRST-0 INOPTSNS INOPTSNS A5 A12 NC ADUCL-0A A9 3
A9 A9 +3.3VA SG 9 109 /WE 7 14 B17 B1 6 10 DRV3-1A ADU-CLT 2 8 6 A8 +24VD1 NC TR-U-CLT
DETACH 7 7 RLADJ1 7 7 MEM2CS-0 A[2] 7 7 CERR-0A INOPTSOL-0A INOPTSOL-0A A6 A11 (CLT1) ADUCL-0A A10 2
A10 A10 +3.3VA DM0 10 110 /CS0 8 13 B16 B2 5 11 DRV4-1A 1 (CLT6)
NC 8 8 RLADJ2 8 8 +5.1VB A[4] 8 8 CACK-0A +24VD1 +24VD1 A7 A10 1
A11 A11 /RESET /DQS0 11 111 VDD 9 12 B15 B3 4 12 DRV5-1A J657 NC
SG 9 9 RGCLK 9 9 MEMRD2-0 A[6] 9 9 STS-0A PG PG A8 A9 SG SG A11
A12 A12 SG SG 12 112 VDD 10 11 B14 B4 3 13 DRV6-1A 3 9 5 A9 NC e-STUDIO455
NC 10 10 AG 10 10 CLKOE-1 A[8] 10 10 SBSY-0A OFFSET1A OFFSET1A A9 A8 SFBEMP-1 A12
A13 A13 REFCLK+ DQS0 13 113 /CAS 11 10 B13 B5 2 14 DRV7-1A SFB-EMP-SNR 2 SFBEMP-1 10 4 A10
NC 11 11 -12VB 11 11 TXEN2-1 A[10] 11 11 SG OFFSET2A OFFSET2A A10 A7 (S12) 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
A14 A14 REFCLK- DQ6 14 114 ODT0 12 9 B12 B6 1 15 +5VB 1 11 3 A11 A11
/RESET 12 12 AG 12 12 +5.1VB A[12] 12 12 IDATX[0] A11 A6 e-STUDIO355
A15 A15 SG SG 15 115 /CS1 13 8 B11 B7 SG J658 A12
NC 13 13 +12VB 13 13 A[16] A[14] 13 13 IDATX[2] A12 A5 SFBCLT-0A SFBCLT-0A HRNS-FEED-SW2-471HF
Bluetooth module
A16 A16 PERpO DQ7 16 116 A13 14 7 B10 B8 HRNS-LGC-MOT-L-471HF PFPCK-1A 3 12 2 A12
NC 14 14 +24VB 14 14 A[14] A[16] 14 14 IDATX[4] A13 A4 SFB-CLT NC +24VD1
A17 A17 PERnO DQ2 17 117 VDD 15 6 B9 B9 PG (CLT3) 2 13 1 A13 J670 J659
NC 15 15 16Hz 15 15 A[12] A[18] 15 15 IDATX[6] CN402 CN303 A14 A3 +24V SG SG
A18 A18 SG SG 18 118 VDD 16 5 B8 B10 PG 1 B1 6 1 3
NC 16 16 AG 16 16 A[10] SG 16 16 SG +5VB +5VB A15 A2 BTMFED-1 BTMFED-1 2ND-FEED-
B1 B1 +12VA DQ3 19 119 ODT1 17 4 B7 B11 12 1 PG B2 5 2 2 SNR(S14)
NC 17 17 CI 17 17 A[8] SG 17 17 IVSYNC-0A SG SG A16 A1 PFP/LCF HRNS-SIDE-SW-471 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
B2 B2 +12VA DQ12 20 120 NC 18 3 B6 B12 11 2 NC B3 4 3 1
NC 18 18 ANSDET
ANSDE 18 18 A[6] D[1] 18 18 SG EXTVR-1 EXTVR-1 B20
B3 B3 +12VA SG 21 121 SG 19 2 B5 B13 10 3 +24VD1 J687 J649 J654
SG IHSYNC-0A EXTMEN-1A EXTMEN-1A B1 B19
PWA-F-MOT2 (MOT2)
20 20 REVB 20 20 A[2] D[5] 20 20 SG EXTMDIR-0A EXTMDIR-0A B2 B18 (SW5) SG SG CSTSIDESW-1 CSTSIDESW-1 FEED-COV-
B5 B5 SMCLK DQ8 23 123 DQ32 B3 B15 8 5 PFPMPLL-0 1 2 1 B2 B5 2 5 2
21 21 INTHOOK 21 21 A[0] D[7] 21 21 IRCLK-1A EXTMCK-1A EXTMCK-1A B3 B17 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE SNR(S13)
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
Copy key card RGST-SNR
B15 B15 PETnO SG 33 133 SG TXP 4 NC PFPCNT-0 J664 B11 3 5 2 (S22)
(10BASE-T/ 31 31 D[6] A[17] 31 31 5 CN401 CN304 B13 B7 VCMFN-0A 3.3VFUSE 3.3VFUSE
B16 B16 SG SG 34 134 DQ38 TXCT 5 SG PFPRST-0 TRU-FAN 2 6 4 B8 B12 2 6 1
100BASE-TX) 32 32 D[8] ROMDET0-0 32 32 6 REVVR-1 REVVR-1 B14 B6 M +24VD1 NC NC
B17 B17 /PRSNT2 DQ10 35 135 DQ34 RXCT 6 NC 8 1 LCFCNT-0 (M9) 1 7 3 B9 1 7
CN9 or CN4 33 33 D[10] +5.1VB 33 33 7 REVMEN-1A REVMEN-1A B15 B5 NC +24VD1
B18 B18 SG DQ14 36 136 DQ39 RXN 7 CN502 7 2 LCFEMPF-1 8 2 B10
34 34 D[12] LEDDL-0 34 34 REVMDIR-0A REVMDIR-0A B16 B4 J685B J685A NC YOBIFAN-0A HRNS-LGC-FAN-471HF
DQ11 37 137 DQ35 RXP 8 1 1 TXB 6 3 NC (ADU-FG) (FG) 9 1 B11
35 35 D[14] REVMCK-1A REVMCK-1A B3
DQ15 38 138 SG LEDG-A 9 2 2 RXIN 5 4 NC CN317 J667
36 36 SG CN701 CN121 REVCNT-0 REVCNT-0 B2 B12 +24VD1
SG 39 139 SG LEDG-C 10 3 3 CML
CM 4 5 NC 1 1 PU-FAN
37 37 MOD2DET-0
MOD2DE -0 +5.1VB REVSOL-0A REVSOL-0A B1 e-STUDIO455 PUFAN-0A M
CN118 SG 40 140 DQ44 LEDY-A 11 4 4 LD 1 1 3 6 B13 2 2 (M2)
38 38 SG DA1 REVSW-1 REVSW-1
1 1 /WAKE SG 41 141 DQ40 LEDY-C 12 5 5 ER/HK 2 2 2 7 J669
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
5 5 RESERVED DQ17 45 145 SG CN111 9 9 RGCLK 6 6 J626 J534 5 1
43 43 -12VB +5.1VB DEVCNT-0 ERSLP-0A ERSLP-0A HMS-1A
MODEM board
6 6 +1.5VA DQ21 46 146 /DQS5 VBUS 1 10 10 AG 7 7 CN404 1 14 1 13 1 3 1 3 6 2 TEMP/MUMI
44 44 AG DD6 J660 ERSLP-0A +24VD1 +24VD1 PWA-F-DLE SG
7 7 /CLKREQ SG 47 147 DM5 D- 2 USB connector 11 11 -12VB 8 8 ADUM+A 2 13 2 12 2 1 3 1 7 3 SNR (S25)
45 45 MD2INT-1
MD2IN -1 +5.1VB 1 1 +24VD1 NC NC (DLE) TEMP-1A
8 8 RESERVED SG 48 148 DQS5 D+ 3 (Device) 12 12 AG 9 9 +24VD2 3 12 3 11 2 2 2 8 4
46 46 MOD2CS-0 DD9 2 2 ATSVR-1A
9 9 SG /DQS2 49 149 SG SG 4 13 13 +12VB 10 10 ADUM-A 4 11 4 10
47 47 MOD2RST-0
MOD2RS -0 SG 3 ATS-1A HRNS-ATS-471 HRNS-LGC-CST-OP-471HF(1/2)
DDR2 SO-DIMM
3 ADU-MOT
10 10 RESERVED NC 50 150 SG 14 14 NC 11 11 ADUM+B M 5 10 5 9
C 48 48 SG DD12 4 4 (M5) PG HRNS-FEED-UNIT-471HF C
11 11 REFCLK- DQS2 51 151 DQ42 CN108 15 15 16Hz 12 12 +24VD2 6 9 6 8 CN453 J627
49 49 RXEN2-1 SG 5 5 EEPROMCK
12 12 RESERVED DM2 52 152 DQ46 VBUS0 1 16 16 AG 13 13 ADUM-B 7 8 7 7 PG PG CN315 J630 J633
50 50 MEMWRH2-0 SG 6 6 EEPROMDO 1 1 SG SG
13 13 REFCLK+ SG 53 153 DQ43 D0- 2 17 17 CI 14 14 8 7 8 6 ATS-1A ATS-1A A1 14 1 3
51 51 MEMWRL2-0 SG EEPROMDI 2 2 ATTNR-SNR CUEMP-1 PESON
14 14 RESERVED SG 54 154 DQ47 D0+ 3 18 18 ANSDET
ANSDE 15 15 HRNS-MOT-EXIT-L-473 HRNS-EXIT-UNIT-L-473 9 6 9 5 +24VD1 +24VD1 A2 13 2 2 EMP-U-SNR
52 52 A[18] SG EEPROMCS1 3 3 (S8) 5VFUSE +5V (S17)
15 SG DQ18 155 SG ATSVR-1A ATSVR-1A
PWA-F-EPU (EPU)
55 55 A[13] +3.3VB 1 8 1 5 SG CN454 CUTOP-1 TUSON TOP-U-SNR
18 18 SG DQ23 58 158 DQ52 D1+ 7 22 22 NC 19 19 EXITM+B 13 2 13 1 A5 10 5 2 (S16)
56 56 A[11]
A[ 1] INTRQ 2 7 2 4 EXIT-MOT NC DRTH-1A 5VFUSE +5V
19 19 RESERVED SG 59 159 DQ49 SG 8 23 23 +5.1VA
+5.1 20 20 EXITM-A M 14 1 14 2 THMS-DRM A6 9 6 1
57 57 A[9] +3.3VB 3 6 3 3 (M10) SG (THMS4)
20 20 /W-DIS SG 60 160 DQ53 24 24 AG 21 21 EXITM-B 1 J631
58 58 A[7] +5.1VA 4 5 4 2 PU-CON
11.8 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO355/455 for SYS-IMG board)
CURGC-0A
21 21 SG DQ24 61 161 SG CN106 25 25 +5VA
+5 22 22 +24VD2 J668 A7 8 7 3
59 59 A[5] -12VB 5 4 5 1 FCOVSW-1 +24VD1 +24V NC CST-U-
22 22 /PERST DQ28 62 162 SG VBUS0 1 26 26 -12VB 23 23 15 2 FRONT-COV- A8 7 8 2 FEED-CLT
60 60 A[3] SG J637 SG HRNS-LGC-LDR-471 (CLT4)
23 23 PERnO DQ25 63 163 NC D0- 2 USB connector 27 27 AG 24 24 SG 16 1 SW (SW4) 1
61 61 A[1] +12VB 6 3 6 3
24 24 +3.3Vaux DQ29 64 164 CK1 D0+ 3 (Internal) 28 28 +12VB 25 25 OCTHOME-1 J632
62 62 CPURST-0
CPURS -0 DA0 7 2 7 2 OCT-HOME- CN203 CN202 CN201 CN313 SG SG
25 25 PERpO SG 65 165 SG SG 4 29 29 NC 26 26 5VFUSE SNR (S24) +5VB SG A9 6 9 3
63 63 CEP2IN -1
CEP2INT-1 DA2 8 1 8 1 3 1 1 1 CUFLS-1 NREEMPON NEAR-EMP-
26 26 SG SG 66 166 /CK1 30 30 NC 27 27 PWA-F-SNS BDIN-0 +5VD A10 5 10 2 U-SNR
64 64 +5.1VB IDECS 2 2 2 2 5VFUSE +5V (S15)
27 27 SG DM3 67 167 /DQ56 28 28 (SNS) SG +5VD A11 4 11 1
65 65 +5.1VB DD1 HRNS-MOT-EXIT-U-473 HRNS-EXIT-UNIT-U-473 1 3 3 3 NC NC
28 28 +1.5VA /DQS3 68 168 SG 29 29 SG 3 12
66 66 IORD2-0 DD2 4 4 NC NC
29 29 SG NC 69 169 DQ56 CN117 CN810 30 30 CN406 WRLVL-1 2 13
CN811 CN702 67 67 IOWR2-0 DD4 J678 J662 5 5 NC NC
30 30 SMB-CLK DQS3 70 170 DM6 +12VB 31 31 REVM+A SG 1 14 J642
1 1 1 1 +24VB 68 68 D[1] DD5 1 12 1 5 6 6 SG
31 31 PETnO SG 71 171 SG SG 32 32 REVM+B BDIN-0 A12 1 CST-U-SW
2 2 2 2 PG 69 69 D[3] DD7 2 11 2 4 7 7 CUSW-1
32 32 SMB-DATA SG 72 172 SG 33 33 REVM-A SG A13 2 (SW6)
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
JPD model only 3 3 NC 70 70 D[5] DD8 3 10 3 3 8 8 NC
33 33 PETpO DQ26 73 173 DQ50 34 34 REVM-B REV-MOT M PIDT-1 A14
71 71 D[7] DD10 4 9 4 2 (M14) 9 9 HRNS-FEED-UNIT-471HF
34 34 SG DQ30 74 174 DQ54 CN812 CN401 35 35 24VD2 PIDT-0
PWA-F-MOT2 (MOT2)
72 72 D[9] DD11 5 8 5 1 10 10
11-9
A8 93 193 SG HRNS-SCN-APSA-470 (A4 series) CN19 CN132 BRGFULL-1 1 14 J643
3 13 3 HRNS-MAIN-MOT-471HF SG
A6 94 194 DQ63 CN17 HRNS-SCN-APSL-470 NC SG HRNS-BRIDGE-FULL-507 B12 1 CST-L-SW
1 1 4 12 4 CLSW-1 (SW7)
VDD 95 195 SDA 1 1 MDT[0] NC NC J233 CN308 B13 2
J27 CN15 2 2 11 5 J803 J806 3.3V NC
VDD 96 196 SG 2 2 MDT[2] +5V NC BRGCNT-0 1 1 B14
3 1 3 3 5 10 6 1 3 1 EEPROMCS HRNS-ACIN2-473 HRNS-SFUSE-471
A5 97 197 SCL 3 3 MDT[4] APS-R APSR NC NC NC 2 2 (Service parts)
CN112 2 2 4 4 9 7 2 2 2 FULL-SNR EEPROMCK HRNS-ACIN1-473
A4 98 198 SA0 VCC 4 4 MDT[6] (S5) SG NC BRGOPEN-1 PWA-F-CTIF 3 3 J624 J460
1 1 3 5 5 6 8 8 3 1 3 EEPROMDO
A3 99 199 VDD-SPD ROCK SYS-FAN-MOT 5 5 MRD NC BRGFED-1 (CTIF) 4 4 1 1 1
2 M J26 6 6 7 7 9 J801 EEPROMDI PWA-F-SFUSE
A2 100 200 SA1 SG (M6) 6 6 PNLDT0 +5V NC NC NC 5 5 CN309 J622 2 2 2
3 3 4 7 7 6 10 1 SG 3.3VSW
7 7 PNLDT2 APS-C APSC NC BRGSOL-0 FEED-COV- 6 6 1 6 1
2 5 8 8 8 5 11 2 SG HRNS-EXIT-SW471
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
E HRNS-HDD-471 8 8 MAD[4] (S4) SG NC +24VD2 SNR (S13) 2 5 2 E
1 6 9 9 9 4 12 3 FUSCUT-0A
CN114 9 9 MAD[6] NC NC NC J647 3 4 3 J684 J625
J25 10 10 3 13 J804 +24VD1 SG
5V NC 10 10 MAD[8] +5V NC NC NC TNR-MOT 2 14 4 3 4 3 1 3
4 1 3 7 11 11 2 14 1 M (M4) TNRMTRON-0A EXTSW-1
CN107 SG NC 11 11 MAD[10] APS3 APS3 NC NC NC GATE-SOL 1 15 5 2 5 2 2 2 EXIT-SNR
3 2 2 8 12 12 1 15 2 NC 5VFUSE
SG NC 12 12 MAD[12] (S3) SG NC 16 6 1 6 1 3 1
2 3 1 9 13 13 J805 NC
CNT 1 13 13 MAD[14] SG 17
1 4 J24 14 14 1
A17 2 14 14 MAD[16] +5V SCNCNT J644 J621 J623
5 (HDD-POWER) 3 10 15 15 2 OPEN-SW MMTRBK-0A FUSCNT-1
SDA/SI 3 15 15 MAD[18] APS2 APS2 SG 8 7 7 7 1 1 8 2 THMS-C-HTR
6 (S2) 2 11 16 16 Option 3 NC MTH+-1A (THMS1)
SG 4 16 16 SG SG SCNCTS 7 8 6 2 2 7 1
7 1 12 17 17 MMTRPLL-0 MTH-1A
SCL 5 17 17 SG SCNOUT 6 8 9 5 3 3 6
8 18 18 MMTRCCW-1A STH+-1A
INT/SO 6 18 18 MDT[1] SG 5 9 10 4 4 4 5 2 THMS-S-HTR
9 J23 19 19 MMTRCK-1A STH-1A (THMS2)
/CS 7 19 19 MDT[3] A4 +5V MMPIO HRNS-MOT-JSP-473 HRNS-JSP-SW-506 4 10 11 3 5 5 4 1
10 3 13 20 20 MMTRON-0A ETH+-1A
A13 8 20 20 MDT[5] series APS1 APS1 SG CN409 3 11 12 2 6 6 3
11 HDD 2 14 21 21 J680 J452 SG ETH-1A
A12 9 21 21 MDT[7] only (S1) SG SCNRTS SG MAIN-MOT 2 12 13 1 7 7 2 2 HTMS-EDG-
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
30 30 MAD[15]
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
(M1)
2 7 7 SG D2 28 DATA8 5 5 SCLK +3.3V 4 4 SG 6 TSIZE1-1A
XR 43 38 78 3 +24V 41 41 PG B5
SCAN-MOT
3 8 8 CPPOW D13 29 DATA10 6 6 SD0 +3.3V 5 5 5 TSIZE0-1A
Copy key card
YU 44 37 77 4 SCNMAB +24VD2 B6
TCP (TCP)
4 9 9 CPPSW D1 30 DATA12 7 7 CSBLUE +3.3V 6 6 4 Download jig (LGC) +5VB
45 36 76 5 +24VD2 B7
J424 10 10 SG D14 31 DATA14 8 8 SCLK +3.3V 3 CTRCNT2-0
46 35 75 6 PG B8
FRAWE 11 11 CP-RTS D0 32 A19 9 9 SD0 SG 8
1 47 34 74 7 PG
LOAD 12 12 SG D15 33 A17 10 10 CEGRN SG 7
2 48 33 73 8
CP 13 13 CP-CTS /BHE 34 A15 11 11 SCLK BD9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5 51 30 70 11 2 12 12 5 1 4
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
A[11]
D[11]
A[20]
A[18]
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
RD-0
A[19]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[21]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
D[13]
D[15]
LCD
FCTCNT-0
D/LROMCS2
8 54 27 67 14 5 10 10 8 4 1
D0 19 19 SG A3 40 A03 17 17 ACLP BD3 +5V +5VB HRNS-PWR-LGC-471HF
D/LROMCNT-0
9 55 26 66 15 6 8 8 2
D1 20 20 TXCLKP A6 41 A1 18 18 ADCLK BD2 LMPON
10 56 25 65 16 7 17 17 CN415 CN301
D2 21 21 TXCLKN A4 42 /RD 19 19 SG BD1 24VGND PG +5VB
11 57 24 64 17 8 13 13 14 1 1
D3 22 22 SG A5 43 /CS0-A 20 20 SG BD0 +24V +24VD1 +5VB Option J1 CN320 HVPS HRNS-HVPS3-471
12 58 23 63 18 9 15 15 12 2 2
23 23 TXD2P 3.3VA 44 /CS0-B 21 21 +5V SG +5VB 1 1 SG
59 22 62 19 3 3 J424
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
24 24 TXD2N SG 45 +3.3VA 22 22 +5V SG NC SG 2 2 +5VB J608
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
60 21 61 20 9 16 4 DEV
J429 J426 HRNS-LGC-PS-SIG-473HF OUT3 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AD0 OUT3
10
25 25 SG 3.3VA 46 +3.3VA 23 23 +5V GD9 HRNS-SCN-ADF-470 NC SG 3 3
SCN15 61 20 60 21 J32 10 7 5 (DEV)
1 1 26 26 TXD1P SG 47 SG 24 24 SG GD8 +24VD1 SG 4 4 AD2
CN11
G SCN14 62 19 59 22 LP-EXPO (EXP) 1 1 16 16 11 8 6 CN300 CN420 HRNS-HVPS2-471 G
2 2 27 27 TXD1N A18 48 SG 25 25 SG GD7 +5VD 5 5 AD4 PG
SCN13 63 18 58 23 2 2 18 18 14 7 1 9
PWA-F-CCD (CCD)
3 3 28 28 SG RESET 49 DATA1 26 26 SG GD6 PG SG 6 6 AD6 +24VD1 J423
SG
SG
SCN12 64 17 57 24 3 3 14 14 13 9 8 2 8 GRID J607
DFTXD
DFCNT
4 4 29 29 TXD0P A19 50 DATA3 27 27 SH GD5 +24VD1 7 7 I/O0 HVTM-0A OUT2 1 OUT2
SCN11 65 16 56 25 19 9 3 7 (GRID)
I/O0
I/O2
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
5 5 30 30 TXD0N DATA5 28 28 CCDSW GD4 +24VD1 8 8 HVMVR-1 J427
RET0 66 15 55 26 21 10 4 6 J611
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
GB
J22
CN2
SG DATA7 29 29 I/O0
I/O4
10
6 6 31 31 CK2 GD3 +24VD1 9 9 HVDVR-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DATA9 30 30 I/O0
I/O6
10
7 7 CK1 GD2 +24V +24VD1 10 10 HVTAC-0A (GB)
RET2 68 13 53 28 1 24 12 6 4
8 8 HRNS-SYS-DSP-470 DATA11 31 31 SHMON GD1 LMPON PG 11 11 SG HVTTCHG-0A HRNS-HVPS1-471
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
RET3 69 12 52 29 2 13 13 7 3
9 9 PWR-EN DATA13 32 32 SHCLR GD0 (INV) 24VGND PG 12 12 WE HVTT-0A
RET8 1 20 70 1 51 30 3 15 14 8 2 J422
J606
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN2
CSIP2-0
CSIP2-0A
DATA15 33 33 11
10
10 10 SYS-EN CP SG PG 13 13 HVTVR-1 MG
RET9 2 19 71 10 50 31 17 15 9 1 OUT1 1 OUT1
11 11 PWR-DN A18 34 34 RS SG PG 14 14 +5VB (MG)
J21
PWA-F-DSP (DSP)
3 18 72 9 49 32 18 16 J425
NC A16 35 35 SG RD9 +5V +5V +5VB 15 15 IPCS -0
IPCSW-0 J609
4 17 73 8 48 33 CN1 14 14 1 1 6 6 4 FG CN421 TR
J428 J425 SG A14 36 36 SG RD8 SG SG SG 16 16 SG HVTGB-0A OUT4 1 OUT4
LDFC-1 5 16 74 7 47 34 1 12 12 2 2 5 5 3 10 5 (TR)
1 1 SG A12 37 37 +10.5V RD7 +24VB +24VB +24VD3 17 17 +5VB HVSAV-1
LDFC-2 6 15 75 6 46 35 RADF 2 17 17 3 3 4 4 15 CN431 11 4 J426
2 2 SG A10 38 38 +10.5V RD6 +24VB +24VB +24VD3 +5VB J599 J2 18 18 AD1 HVSDWN-1 SEP J610
LDFC-4 7 14 76 5 45 36 3 18 18 4 4 3 3 16 4 1 RXD RXD 12 3 OUT5 1 OUT5
3 3 SG A08 39 39 SG RD5 +24VGND +24VGND PG SG PWA-F-FUS (FUS) 1 1 19 19 AD3 HVCLK-0A (SEP)
IPC board / CNV board
LDFC-5 8 13 77 4 44 37 4 15 15 5 5 2 2 17 10 2 SG SG 13 2
4 4 +5VS A06 40 40 SG RD4 +24VGND +24VGND PG 2 2 20 20 AD5 HVAVR-1 HRNS-GB-FUSER-471
LDFC-6 9 12 78 3 43 38 5 16 16 6 6 1 1 18 HRNS-FUS-471 TXD TXD 14 1
5 5 +5VS A04 41 41 SG RD3 3 3 21 21 AD7
PWA-F-KEY (KEY)
LDFC-7 10 11 79 2 42 39 JDR Model :Standard SG SG J612 J611
6 6 SG A02 42 42 SG RD2 4 4 22 22 I/O0
I/O1 FG
LDFC-8 11 10 80 1 41 40 FG 20 20 FG Other Model:Option FG
7 7 +5VA A0 43 43 Option NC 5 5 23 23 I/O0
I/O3
LDFC-9 12 9 11 F-CNT
8 8 +5VA A20 44 44 NC 6 6 24 24 I/O0
I/O5 CN416
LDFC-10 13 8 12 Finisher CNT-GND NC
9 9 SG /CS0 45 45 7 7 25 25 I/O0
I/O7 PWRDN-1
LDFC-11 14 7 5 +5VB 15 6
10 10 +12VA +3.3VA 46 46 8 8 26 26 SG SG
PWA-ACC (LVPS)
LDFC-12 15 6 6 SG F-CNT 16 5
11 11 +12VA RMSL 47 47 9 9 27 27 OE HTR1ON-1A
LDFC-13 16 5 23 NC CNT-GND 17 4
12 12 SG /WR 48 48 10 10 28 28 IPCRST-0 HTR2ON-1A
LDFC-15 17 4 20 +24VD4 18 3
13 13 SG SG 49 49 11 29 29 +5VB HTRASTON-1A
LDON0 18 3 PG 19 2
H 14 14 NC SG 50 50 12 30 30 SG HTRRLYOFF-1 H
LDON1 19 2 20 1
15 15 +5VB
SG 20 1
16 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11.9 Electric Parts Layout (e-STUDIO355/455 for SYS-IMG board)
[A] Scanner unit, control panel [B] Power supply, developer unit [C] Laser unit, fuser unit, toner cartridge [D] Drive unit
S5 ERS SYS-IMG
S4 HDD
M1
THMO1
CCD S8 THMS2 MOT2
INV M6
SLG
THMS3 S9 M5
DH2 LGC
S7
THMS1
S6 S3
S1 THMO2
S2
THMO3 M4
KEY
EXP LAMP3 M8
SW3
M2 CTIF
TCP
LAMP1
DH1 CTRG S25
P-INV THMS4
LAMP2
HVPS
DSP SNS
SW2 M7
THMO4
LDR
LVPS
EPU FUS
M3
SW4
DH3
SW1
[E] Automatic duplexing unit, transfer unit, exit unit [F] Bypass feed unit [G] Drawer unit
M11 CLT6
SOL1 CLT7
M14
S11 S13
SFB
M10
S14
S24
S23
M9
CLT1
CLT2
M13
S21
CLT5
S15
S10 S16
S22 M12
S12
S17
S18
SW6 S19
SW7 S20